Specifications RED ROCK CENTER
PHASE II SITE AND
BUILDING A
RECEIVE"
\A■',) 1, 5 2011
CITY OF TIGARD
0 BUILDING DIVISION
S.9 11
3241
M. DE .ON
(
fif SK*
P'RTLAN',OREGON
/.' OF 0'--
GC_?hC -c0(7
S ITZ)(( •- ecco
City of Tigard ANDERSON
A. *roved Plans Li DABROWSKI
By ` =i►u. Date v (ZU4 ARCHITECTS
LLC
1
OFFICE COPY 1430 SE 3rd Avenue
Suite 200
Portland, OR 97214
l Tel: () -7
Fax: (503503 239
) 239 -732 7
www.ADarchitects.com
Project No. AD 05183.01
Permit Set 01/25/11
PROJECT
SPECIFICATIONS
r..
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division Section Title
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 SUMMARY
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
047000 MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
DIVISION 5 - METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY (WOOD FRAMING) - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
061600 . SHEATHING - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
061753 SHOP - FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES — SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
061800 STRUCTURAL GLUED - LAMINATED TIMBER - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
072500 WEATHER BARRIERS
072726 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER
074600 SIDING
075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
084113 ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
092216 NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
096513 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
099653 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101300 DIRECTORIES
101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
105500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
107313 AWNINGS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260000 GENERAL PROVISIONS
260500 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
260519 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING
260533 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
260553 IDENTIFICATION
262000 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
262400 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANEL BOARDS
262726 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
262800 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OVERCURRENT DEVICES)
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
265000 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
310100 MAINTENANCE OF EARTHWORK - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
310500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EARTHWORK- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
310600 SCHEDULES FOR EARTHWORK- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
311000 SITE CLEARING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
311400 EARTH STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
312000 EARTH MOVING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
313000 EARTHWORK METHODS- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
320500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
321000 BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
321 100 BASE COURSES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
321200 FLEXIBLE PAVING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
321300 RIGID PAVING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
321400 UNIT PAVING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
321413 DECORATIVE BRICK PAVING
321600 CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
321700 PAVING SPECIALTIES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
328423 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
328425 DRIP IRRIGATION
329113 SOIL PREPARATION
329300 PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
331000 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE OF UTILITIES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
330600 SCHEDULES FOR UTILITIES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
330800 COMMISSIONING OF UTILITIES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
331000 WATER UTILITIES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
331100 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
331200 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
331300 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
333100 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
333900 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE STRUCTURES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
334200 CULVERTS- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
334400 STORM UTILITY WATER DRAINS- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
334600 SUBDRAINAGE- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
334900 STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES- SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division One
SECTION 011000 011000 - 1
SUMMARY
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Phased construction.
4. Access to site.
5. Work restrictions.
6. Specification and drawing conventions.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Red Rock Center Phase II Site Work and Building A
1. Project Location: City of Tigard, SW 72n and SW Dartmouth .
B. Owner: Doug Fry
908 Deborah Rd.
Newberg, Oregon 97312
Tel: 503.348.2237
C. Construction Manager:
Brian Keicher
1001 SE Water Ave #121
Portland, Oregon 97214
Tel: 503.740.4940 Fax: 503.595.0145
D. Architect: Anderson Dabrowski Architects, LLC
Architect of Record, Jon Anderson, AIA
Project Manager: Margaret Wilson
1430;SE 3rd Ave, Suite 200
Portland, OR 97214
Tel: 503.239.7377 Fax: 503.239.7327
E. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who
have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 011000 011000 - 2
SUMMARY
1. Electrical Engineer: System Design Consultants
1515 SE Water Avenue, Suite 400
Portland, Oregon 97214
Tel: 503.248.0227 Fax: 503.248.0240
Contact: Steve Watkins
2. Structural Engineer: Nordling Structural Engineering, LLC
6775 SW 111th #200
Beaverton, Oregon 97008
Tel: 503.924.5901 Fax: 503.924.5903
Contact: John Nordling
Contact: Jonathan Walters
F. Other Owner Consultants: The Owner has retained the following design professionals who
have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1. Civil Engineer: PACE Engineers
5000 Meadows Road, Suite 345
Lake Oswego, OR 97035
Tel: 503.597.3222 Fax: 503.597.7655
Contact: Brian Lee
Contact: Andy Reiter
2. Landscape Architect: MacDonald Environmental Planning, PC
1022 SW Salmon Street, Suite 470
Portland, OR 97205
Tel: 503.224.1225 Fax: 503.295.6906
Contact: Laurel MacDonald Bonnell
Contact: Brenda Rowen
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. This drawings and specifications are for a new retail medical office building shell and
associated site work. The site work and shell will have two separate contracts.
1.5 PHASED CONSTRUCTION
A. The Work shall be conducted in two concurrent phases, with each phase substantially complete
as indicated:
1. Phase Site Work: This will be the all of the site work associated with Phase II of Red
Rock Center.
2. Phase Building A: This will be the shell of Building A only.
Contractors to coordinate all work between site and building.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 011000 011000 - 3
SUMMARY
1.6 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not
disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
l .8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations on Drawings.
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
•
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012500 012500 - 1
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A, facsimile of form provided in Project
Manual.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable: •
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II sub WORK AND BUILDING A
r JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012500 012500 - 2
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
• g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC -ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays -
in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate wort of the approved
substitutions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012500 012500 - 3
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 20 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered
or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012500 012500 - 4
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 = EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SIFE ' WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 012600 012600 - 1
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect's standard Field
Order Form.
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner - Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 7 days, when not otherwise specified after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time
necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012600 012600 - 2
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor - Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order
for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012900 012900 - 1
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
•
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
I. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012900 012900 - 2
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -
hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts
in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under principal subcontracts for Project closeout
requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and
subcontract amount.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. If required,
include evidence of insurance.
7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each
purchase contract. Show line -item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments
or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.
10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012900 012900 - 3
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent
with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 10th of the
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last
day of the month.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form
for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,
whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at
time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner - requested project
acceleration.
F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items
stored on -site and items stored off -site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include
overhead and profit on stored materials.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012900 012900 - 4
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
• a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application (
for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and
remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments if required.
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit' conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from
every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is
lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.
J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating
Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.
5. Products list (preliminary if not final).
6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 012900 012900 - 5
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
1 1 . Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
14. Performance and payment bonds.
15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion
for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously
for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
L. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013100 013100 - 1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Requests for Information (RFIs).
4. Project meetings.
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
are assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field- engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013100 013100 - 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e -mail addresses. Provide
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of
individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their •
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013100 013100 - 3
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that
are designated as Owner's property.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1. Content: Project - specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.
Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components.
b. Coordinate the addition of trade - specific information to the coordination drawings
by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the
information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before
submitting for review.
c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
f. Indicate required installation sequences.
g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire- protection, fire- alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations
of visible ceiling- mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict
between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire - protection, fire - alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 01 3100 013100 - 4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire -rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1 -1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire -
alarm locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
8. Fire - Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared
in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform
Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to
requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
C. Design Building Drawings: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following
requirements:
1. Design Build drawings will use the architect's provided background and title block.
2. Affix Design Professional's seal of Oregon State License on all drawings.
3. Design Build Contractor is responsible for submitting documents to the Authority Having
Jurisdiction for their work for permit and paying all fees associated with permit or
review.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INNFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013100 013100 - 5
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: Contractor's Standard Form.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow 7 working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after
1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor - generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013100 013100 - 6
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 7 days if Contractor disagrees
with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013100 013100 - 7
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
J. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures.
1. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
P. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.
1. Coordinate' dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013100 013100 - 8
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off -site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
• 13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
•
END OF SECTION 013100
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013200 013200 - 1
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Startup construction schedule.
2. Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Construction schedule updating reports.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Site condition reports.
7. Special reports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
•early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An.activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD0518101
SECTION 013200 013200 - 2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2. PDF electronic file.
3. Two paper copies, as required in specification sections
B. Startup construction schedule.
•
1. Approval of cost - loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of
schedule of values for cost - loaded activities.
C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.
D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) .
and date on label.
E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format
for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource
loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION O1 3200 013200 - 3
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
H. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations and interim
milestones.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner - furnished products.
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies.
9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.
10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,
progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013200 013200 - 4
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final
completion.
l . Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of
punch list items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
5. Owner - Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013200 013200 - 5
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
1. Building flush -out.
m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
c. Permanent space enclosure.
d. Completion of mechanical installation.
e. Completion of electrical installation.
f. Substantial Completion.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion and the
following interim milestones:
1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unretumed submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013200 013200 - 6
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by
which recovery will be accomplished.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar -chart -type construction schedule within
seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt -chart-type,
Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since
the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
] . For construction . activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
I . List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
•
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (see special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013200 013200 - 7
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013233 013233 - l
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Final completion construction photographs.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.
2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as
project record documents at Project closeout.
3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing
operations commence.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.
1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.
2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect
ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of
photograph, accompanied by key plan file.
3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file
metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
0
SECTION 013233 013233 - 2
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional
photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.
1.5 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum
sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field; and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out -of -focus areas will not be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,
without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image- editing software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project
site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those
submitted to Architect.
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation take photographs of Project
site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from
different vantage points, as directed by Architect.
1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.
2. Take 30 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the
Work.
3. Take 30 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately
record physical conditions at start of construction.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013233 013233 - 3
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent
structures, pavements, and improvements.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly, with timing each month
adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select
vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
F. Architect Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct
photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage
points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and
progress since last photographs were taken.
G. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of
Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform
photographer of desired vantage points.
1. Do not include date stamp.
END OF SECTION 013233
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II STYE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
40
1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the
schedule of values.
1 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and
from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet
protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within
which internal and external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device - independent and display resolution- independent
fixed - layout document format.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 2
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals
required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of
long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing i
for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawing.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in
AutoCAD 2000.
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of
AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement
d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:
1) Floor plans.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2) Reflected ceiling plans.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required 'for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
• 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently- for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal.
D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
•
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
• e. Name of subcontractor.
f. Name of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
I. Other necessary identification.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested
by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract
Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information
as related submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies. If submittal is to be reviewed by consultants
then submit one additional copy per consultant.
2. Informational Submittals: Submit one paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
•
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 5
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory - installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c.. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will
return two copies.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full -size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 6
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
b. Three opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return two copy(ies).
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain Sample
sets; remainder will be returned.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
RED ROCKCENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 013300 013300 - 7
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, will return two copies.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 8
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,
for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 9
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2.2 DELEGATED - DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated- Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor
to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 013300 013300 - 10
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
END OF SECTION 013300
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014000 014000 - 1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality- assurance and - control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality -
assurance and - control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality- assurance and - control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
•
A. Quality- Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality- Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect
C. Mockups: Full -size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014000 014000 - 2
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F. Source Quality - Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality - Control Testing:. Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer /Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade - specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement: Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014000 014000 - 3
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1. Seismic- force - resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality- assurance plan prepared by Architect.
2. Main wind- force - resisting system or a wind - resisting component listed in the wind- force-
resisting system quality- assurance plan prepared by Architect.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality- control service.
1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014000 014000 - 4
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality - control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality - control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality - control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality- control services required of
Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality - control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Where quality - control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality - control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory- authorized service
representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E. Retesting /Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality- control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014000 014000 - 5
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality - control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality - control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance
and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality -
control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with
Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014000 014000 - 6
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality- control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality - control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 1
REFERENCES
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved ": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install ": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 2
REFERENCES
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson
Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate
and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association (The) (703) 358 -2960
www.aluminum.org
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737 -0202
www.aabchq.com
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303 -5664
www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation (202) 624 -5800
Officials
•
www.transportation.org
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549 -8141
www.aatcc.org
ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956 -5888
www.airbarrier.org
•
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367 -1155
www.abma - dc.org
ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848 -3700
www.concrete.org
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506 -7216
www.concrete - pipe.org
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SIFE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 3
REFERENCES
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257 -2530
www.aeic.org
AF &PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878 -8878
www.afandpa.org (202) 463 -2700
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824 -7000
www.aga.org
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872 -5955
www.aham.org
AHRI Air - Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute, The (703) 524 -8800
www.ahrinet.org
AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288 -4960
www.asphaltinstitute.org
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242 -3837
www.aia.org (202) 626 -7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644 -2400
www.aisc.org (312) 670 -2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452 -7100
www.steel.org
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792 -9559
www.aitc - glulam.org
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972 -1700
www.alsc.org
AIVICA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394 -0150
www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293 -8020
www.ansi.org
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780 -7372
www.aosaseed.com
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565 -6600
www.apawood.org
APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454 -6989
www.archprecast.org
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682 -8000
www.api.org
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 4
REFERENCES
ARI Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524 -8800
www.ari.org
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207 -0917
www.asphaltroofing.org
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548 -2723
www.asce.org (703) 295 -6300
ASCE /SEI American Society of Civil Engineers /Structural Engineering
Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- (800) 527 -4723
Conditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org (404) 636 -8400
ASME ASME International (800) 843 -2763
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882 -1170
www.asme.org
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835 -3040
www.asse- plumbing.org
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832 -9500
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628 -6380
www.atis.org
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCMA)
AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534 -8300
www.awci.org
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323 -3636
www.awinet.org
AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733 -4077
(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)
www.awpa.com
AWS American Welding Society (800) 443 -9353
www.aws.org (305) 443 -9353
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926 -7337
www.awwa.org (303) 794 -7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297 -2122
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 5
REFERENCES
www.buildershardware.com
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620 -0010
www.bia.org
BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242 -7405
www.bicsi.org (813) 979 -1991
BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285 -3963
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
www.bifma.com
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342 -4772
www.bissc.org
CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527 -3880
www.carpetcushion.org
• CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232 -3282
www.copper.org (212) 251 -7200
CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230 -9263
www.canelect.ca
CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858 -1555
www.ce.org (703) 907 -7600
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241 -7333
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788 -2700
www.cganet.com
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881 -2462
www.cellulose.org (937) 222 -2462
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584 -1919
www.cisca.org
CISPI Cast lion Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892 -0137
www.cispi.org
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596 -2583
www.chainlinkinfo.org
CPA Composite Panel Association
www.pbmdf.com (703) 724 -1128
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882 -8846
www.carpet - rug.com (706) 278 -3176
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 6
REFERENCES
CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465 -2523
www.coolroofs.org (510) 485 -7175
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517 -1200
www.crsi.org (800) 328 -6306
CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465 -2523
www.coolroofs.org (510) 485 -7175
CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463 -6727
www.csa.ca (416) 747 -4000
CSA CSA International (866) 797 -4272
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747 -4000
www.csa - international.org
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689 -2900
www.csinet.org (703) 684 -0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820 -7700
www.cedarbureau.org
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583 -4087
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222 -2010
www.dhi.org
ECA Electrical Components Association (703)907 -8024
www.ec - central.org
EJA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907 -7500
www.eia.org
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294 -3462
www.eima.com (770) 968 -7945
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295 -6000
http: / /content.asce.org /ejcdc/
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332 -0040
www.ejma.org
ESD ESD Association (315) 339 -6937
(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
www.esda.org
ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) 967 -5352
(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 7
REFERENCES
www.intertek-etlsemko.com
FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00
(The International Basketball Federation)
www.fiba.com
FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35
(The International Volleyball Federation)
www.fivb.ch
FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762 -4300
www.fmglobal.com
FM Global FM Global (401) 275 -3000
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
www.fmglobal.com
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671 -3772
Association, Inc.
www.floridaroof.com
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971 -4850
www.fluidsealing.com
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0
www.fsc.org
GA Gypsum Association
www.gypsum.org (301) 277 -8686
GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271 -0208
www.glasswebsite.com
GRI (Part of GSI)
GS Green Seal (202) 872 -6400
www.greenseal.org
GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522 -8440
www.geosynthetic - institute.org
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464 -8200
www.gamanet.org
HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute /Gas Appliance Manufacturers (908) 464 -8200
Association
Division of Air - Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute (AHRI)
www.ahrinet.org
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 014200 014200 - 8
REFERENCES
(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435 -2900
www.hpva.org
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838 -6550
www.hpwhite.com
IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (515) 282 -8192
www.iapsc.org
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (888) 422 -7233
www.iccsafe.org
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830 -0369
www.icea.net
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827 -0830
www.icri.org
ICPA International Cast Polymer Association (703) 525 -0320
www.icpa - hq.org
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11
www.iec.ch
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419 -7900
www.ieee.org
IFS Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (703) 525 -0320
www.iesna.org
LEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255 -1561
www.iest.org
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233 -1510
www.igmaonline.org
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275 -4426
www.iliai.com
ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The (919) 549 -8411
www.isa.org
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11
www.iso.ch
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464 -7732
www.issfa.net (801) 341 -7360
ITS Intertek Testing Service NA
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 9
REFERENCES
(Now ETL SEMCO)
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11
www.itu.int /home
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264 -1690
www.kcma.org
LGSEA Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association (202) 263 -4488
www.arcat.com
LMA Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488 -6864
www.lightning.org
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241 -7333
www.mbrna.com
MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375 -4718
www.metalconstruction.org
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480 -9138
OD www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644 -6610
www.metalframingmfg.org
MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345 -1815
www.mhia.org (704) 676 -1190
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250 -9222
www.marble - institute.com
MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674 -8937
www.paintinfo.com (604) 298 -7578
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281 -6613
Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss- hq.com
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942 -6591
www.naamm.org
•
NACE NACE International (800) 797 -6223
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228 -6200
www.nace.org
ID
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 10
REFERENCES
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737 -2926
www.nadca.com
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213 -7193, ext.
453
www.aahperd.org /nagws/
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684 -0084
www.naima.org
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557 -2848
www.nbgqa.com
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917 -6222
www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713 -1900
www.ncma.org
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 222 -2300
www.ncta.com
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977 -3698
www.nebb.org
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110
www.necanet.org
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829 -6901
www.nelma.org
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841 -3200
www.nema.org
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300 -6382
www.netaworld.org (269) 488 -6382
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972 -6900
www.nfhs.org
NFPA NFPA (800) 344 -3555
(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770 -3000
www.nfpa.org
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589 -1776
www.nfrc.org
NGA National Glass Association (866) 342 -5642
www.glass.org (703) 442 -4890
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 11
REFERENCES
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933 -0318
www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377 -1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524 -2393
www.nlga.org
NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526 -5016
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers
Association)
www.nofma.org
NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516 -8585
www.nomma.org
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323 -9545
www.nrca.net (847) 299 -9070
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846 -7622
www.nrmca.org (301) 587 -1400
NSF NSF International (800) 673 -6275
(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769 -8010
www.nsf.org
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342 -1415
www.nssga.org (703) 525 -8788
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323 -9736
www.ntma.com (540) 751 -0930
NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422 -4556
www.nwfa.org (636) 519 -9663
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786 -0300
www.pci.org
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589 -8956
www.pdionline.org (978) 557 -0720
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333 -3929
http: / /pgi- tp.cee.uiuc.edu
PTI Post - Tensioning Institute (248) 848 -3180
www.post - tensioning.org
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections
www.boltcouncil.org
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
www.rfci.com (706) 882 -3833
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 12
REFERENCES
RIS Redwood Inspection Service
www.redwoodinspection.com . (925) 935 -1499
SAE SAE International (877) 606 -7323
www.sae.org (724) 776 -4841
SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District (909) 396 -2000
www.aqmd.com
SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542 -5040
www.scte.org (610) 363 -6888
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458 -4647
www.sdi.org
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899 -0010
www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294 -5424
•
www.sefalabs.com (516) 294 -5424
SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute /American Society of Civil
Engineers
(See ASCE)
SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817 -8888
www.siaonline.org (703) 683 -2075
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626 -1995
www.steeljoist.org
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533 -0991
www.smacentral.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803 -2980
National Association
www.smacna.org
lib
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761 -1100
www.smpte.org
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523 -6154
(Formerly: SPI /SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,
Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434 -2611
www.spib.org
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647 -7026
www.spri.org
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 13
REFERENCES
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982 -0355
www.ssina.com (202) 342 -8630
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281 -7772
www.sspc.org (412) 281 -2331
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438 -8265
www.steeltank.com
SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241 -7333
www.steelwindows.com
SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) 681 -1868
www.swpa.org
TCA Tilt -Up Concrete Association (319) 895 -6911
www.tilt - up.org
TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646 -8453
www.tileusa.com
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (914) 332 -0040
www.tema.org
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association /Electronic (703) 907 -7700
Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939 -9700
www.masonrysociety.org
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683 -1010
www.tpinst.org
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405 -8873
www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649 -5555
TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670 -4177
www.tileroofing.org
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854 -3577
www.ul.com (847) 272 -8800
UNI Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243 -3902
www.uni - bell.org
USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786 -5539
www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228 -6800
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795 -1747
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 14
REFERENCES
www.usgbc.org
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488
www.usitt.org (315) 463 -6463
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424 -2869
www.wastec.org (202) 244 -4700
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283 -1486
www.wclib.org (503) 639 -0651
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297 -2122
www.wcmanet.org
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223 -2301
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door (312) 321 -6802
Association)
www.wdma.com
WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute (916) 372 -9943
of California)
www.wicnet.org
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550 -7889
www.wmmpa.com (530) 661 -9591
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725 -0333
www.wsrca.com (650) 570 -5441
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224 -3930
www.wwpa.org
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-
to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V. 49 30 2601 -0
www.din.de
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472 -4100
www.iapmo.org
ICC International Code Council (888) 422 -7233
www.iccsafe.org
ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423 -6587
www.icc - es.org (562) 699 -0543
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 15
REFERENCES
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761 -0011
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638 -2772
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504 -7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482 -2000
www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697 -6257
http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586 -9220
www.energy.gov
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272 -0167
www.epa.gov
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835 -5322
www.faa.gov
FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225 -5322
www.fcc.gov
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463 -6332
www.fda.gov
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111
www.gsa.gov
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708 -1112
www.hud.gov
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486 -4000
www.lbl.gov
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975 -6478
www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321 -6742
www.osha.gov (202) 693 -1999
PBS Public Buildings Service
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 014200 014200 - 16
REFERENCES
(See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690 -7694
http : / /www.hhs.gov /ophs/
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720 -9540
(See USDA)
SD State Department (202) 647 -4000
www.state.gov
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334 -2934
http: / /gulliver.trb.org
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720 -2791
www.usda.gov
USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227 -8772
www.usp.org
USPS Postal Service (202) 268 -2000
www.usps.com
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
• regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872 -
2253
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-
0080
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S. Access Board
www.access - board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-
1800
Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-
1800
www .gpoaccess.gov /cfr /index.html
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus
(See FS)
FED -STD Federal Standard
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 17
REFERENCES
(See FS)
FS Federal Specification (215) 697 -
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil/
Available from Defense Standardization Program
www.dsp.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-
8925
www.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-
7800
www.wbdg.org /ccb
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL -STD (See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-
2253
Available from Access Board (202) 272-
0080
www.access- board.gov
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home (800) 952 -
Furnishings and Thermal Insulation 5210
www.dca.ca.gov /bhfti (916) 574-
2041
CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-
6815
www.calregs.com
CDHS California Department of Health Services (916) 445 -
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 014200 014200 - 18
REFERENCES
4171
www.dhcs.ca.gov
CDPH California Department of Public Health, Indoor Air Quality Section
www.cal - iaq.org
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-
2782
www.cpuc.ca.gov
TFS Texas Forest Service
Forest Resource Development (979) 458-
6606
http: / /txforestservice.tamu.edu
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
RED RQCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000 015000 - 1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect,
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer- service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for
construction operations.
O C. Water Service: Owner will pay water - service use charges for water used by all entities for
construction operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric - power- service use charges for electricity used
by all entities for construction operations.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation - Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
C. Fire - Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire - prevention
program.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000 015000 - 2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
D. Moisture- Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and
construction from water absorption and damage.
1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water
absorption or water damage.
2. Indicate procedures for discarding water - damaged materials, protocols for mitigating
water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water- damaged Work.
3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire- resistive materials,
plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these
operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to
permit installation of finish materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. , _
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC /ANSI A117.1,
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS •
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch, 0.148- inch - thick, galvanized - steel, chain -link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2 -3/8 -inch- OD line
posts and 2 -7/8 -inch thick OD corner and pull posts, with I -5/8 -inch- OD top rails.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other
Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000 015000 - 3
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Furniture required for Project -site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120 -V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4 -foot- square
tack and marker boards.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Coffee machine and supplies.
5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self - contained, liquid - propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline- burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application.
C. Air - Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA - filter- equipped portable units with four -
stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000 015000 - 4
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water
service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these
facilities to condition existing before initial use.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to
level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000
•
015000 - 5
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
b. Field office phone.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Contractor's emergency after -hours telephone number.
e. Architect's office.
f. Engineers' offices.
g. Owner's office.
h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two -way radio for use when
away from field office.
K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office
adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain
electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:
1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3 GHz processing speed.
2. Memory: 4 gigabyte.
3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard -disk drive and combination DVD- RW /CD -RW drive.
4. Display: 22 -inch LCD monitor with 256 -Mb dedicated video RAM.
5. Full -size keyboard and mouse.
6. Network Connectivity: l0 /100BaseT Ethernet.
7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista
Business.
8. Productivity Software:
a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook.
b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher.
c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.
9. Printer: "All -in -one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,
photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.
10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall,
providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.
11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware,
phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.
12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software
providing daily backups.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000 015000 - 6
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within constniction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within
construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1. Provide dust - control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas
in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads
and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas,
within.construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot -mix asphalt pavement until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot -mix asphalt base - course
pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt
Paving."
D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire - fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000 015000 - 7
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste - collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."
J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
•
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities,
and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
C. Pest Control: Engage pest - control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project . site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01 .
SECTION 01 5000 015000 - 8
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture - Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document
visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage.
2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration
of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with
high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water- damaged material..
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any•wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions.
2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and
gypsum -based products, that become wet during the course of construction and
remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.
b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of
exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture
levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured
moisture level within 48 hours.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 015000 015000 - 9
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 -hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration
into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove
soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove
materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and
other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace
street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SIFE ' WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 016000 016000 - 1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products; Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis -of- Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of- design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 016000 016000 - 2
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
B. Basis -of- Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
I. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 016000 016000 - 3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
•
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather - protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project - specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3 See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 016000 016000 - 4
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
I. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or
"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer /Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will be considered.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will be considered.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
5. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 016000 016000 - 5
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample ",
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05 1 83.01
SECTION 017300 017300 - 1
EXECUTION
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner - installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
9. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner- accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
i
SECTION 017300 017300 - 2
EXECUTION
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to ■
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time
permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during
interruption of permanent services and systems.
D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by professional engineer.
F. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land - surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or
increase deflection
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017300 017300 - 3
EXECUTION
C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on -site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in -place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
B. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1. Description of the Work.
2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
4. Recommended corrections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017300 017300 - 4
EXECUTION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
PP Y
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
.-
SECTION 017300 017300 - 5
EXECUTION
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field- engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing
significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by
land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned
as shown on the survey.
1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or
with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE Il SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
ID
SECTION 017300 017300 - 6
EXECUTION
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
1. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017300 017300 - 7
EXECUTION
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as ,required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of
free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: Where existing services /systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services /systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017300 017300 - 8
EXECUTION
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence
of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 OWNER - INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction personnel.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule
for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of
the Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017300 017300 - 9
EXECUTION
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where Contractor and other contractors
are working concurrently.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 1.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period.. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in
Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017300 017300 - 10
EXECUTION
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements."
3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017300
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017419 017419 - 1
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
3. , Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 044313.16 "Adhered Stone Masonry Veneer" for disposal requirements for
excess stone and stone waste.
2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below -grade improvements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off -site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017419 017419 - 2
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end -of- Project rates for salvage /recycling of 50 percent by weight of total
non- hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the
use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
1. Construction Waste:
a. Masonry and CMU.
b. Lumber.
c. Wood sheet materials.
d. Wood trim.
e. Metals.
f. Roofing.
g. Insulation.
h. Carpet and pad.
i. Gypsum board.
J. Piping.
k. Electrical conduit.
1. Packaging: Regardless of salvage /recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph
above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
materials:
1) Paper.
2) Cardboard.
3) Boxes.
4) Plastic sheet and film.
5) Polystyrene packaging.
6) Wood crates.
7) Plastic pails.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost /revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure
throughout waste management plan.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017419 017419 - 3
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved,waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on -site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner.
C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on -site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017419 017419 - 4
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on -site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut -Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as
organic mulch.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper
or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean ground
gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on -site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 017419
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017700 0 17700 - 1
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SECTION 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion
construction photographic documentation.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing
Owner's personnel.
6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 017700 017700 - 2
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
I.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections,
including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 2 through 16
Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to
location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and
model number where applicable.
5. Submit test /adjust/balance records.
6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2, Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified
in Division I Section "Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017700 017700 - 3
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 21 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with
inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the
Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either
on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or
notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for
Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017700 017700 - 4
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 14 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8.5" x 11" papers.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of
document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017700 017700 - 5
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or.that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS -37, or if GS -37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste- removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 01 7700 017700 - 6
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992 -01.
Provide written report on completion of cleaning.
P. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary
Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.
D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls." And Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management."
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
•
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including •
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017700 017700 - 7
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017823 017823 - 1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
SECTION 017823 — OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Product maintenance manuals.
4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and
compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017823 017823 - 2
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format for review:
1. Two paper copies, one to be labeled "Owner's Copy ". Include all items noted in the
"Project As- Builts / O &M Submittal Checklist following this section. Architect will
return both copies copies.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before
commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and
content of manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Architect, MEP Engineers, Hospital Facilities Manager and Construction Manager will return
copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to
commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Table of contents.
2. Record Drawing Disks.
3. Warranties.
a. General Contractor 1 Year Warranty
b. General and Subcontractor Conditional Lien Release
c. Project Warranty Checklist
d. Copy of Signed Off Punchlist
4. Asbestos Free Statement.
5. Permits.
a. Certificate of Occupancy.
b. Final Inspection Sign -off Permit Card.
6. Subcontractor / Supplier List.
a. Subcontractor / Supplier Contact List.
b. Finish Schedule.
7. Other Closeout Reports.
a. Air Balance Report.
b. Medical Gas Certification / Testing.
c. Medical Gas Brazer's Certification.
d. Valve Tag Chart.
e. Other
8. Operation & Maintenance Data with Subcontractor Warranty listed per Specification
Divisions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017823 017823 - 3
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
B. Table of Contents: Include Hospital, Project Name, Architect's and Contractor's Project
Numbers, Project Start Date and Project Finish Date at top of page. List each product included
in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the, content of the volume, and cross -
referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
C. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered, binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents but no larger than 3 ", sized to hold 8- 1 /2 -by -11 -inch paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold end label describing contents and with pockets inside
covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to .accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross -
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title, General Contractor's Project
Manager, Owner's Construction Manager and Architect of Record. Indicate
volume number for multiple- volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross - referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment or record documents.
2.2 OPERATION MANUALS
alp A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
OD 6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017823 017823 - 4
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name. ,
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break -in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color - coding where required for
identification.
2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation
or identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017823 017823 - 5
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information,_as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or
schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
RED ROCK CENTER"- PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017823 017823 - 6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross - referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 1 Section
"Project Record Documents."
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017823 017823 - 7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
E. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017839 017839 - 1
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SECTION 017839 — PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for final property survey.
2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of
the Work in those Sections.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a. Final Submittal:
1) Submit record digital data files and 2 set(s) of record digital data file plots.
2) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information
were recorded.
B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,
including addenda and contract modifications.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017839 017839 - 2
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross - reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red - colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately after inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion (Architect's Punch List), Contractor will prepare a full set of corrected digital data
files of the Contract Drawings on backgrounds supplied by Architect, as follows:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 017839 017839 - 3
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. Format: DWG, Version 2000, Microsoft Windows operating system.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.
4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Architectural Record
Drawings for use in recording information.
a. See Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of
Architect's digital data files.
b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate
layers.
c. Design build trades must use the supplied title block for recording their final
drawings on.
d. To the best of the Architect's belief and understanding, the submitted information
on the Record Drawings is accurate, however the Architect makes the Data
available as a convenience to the Contractor, and the Architect does not guarantee
the accuracy of the Drawings or the Dimensions thereon. The Contractor shall
verify the accuracy of the furnished information.
C. Format: Record drawings shall have the title block information updated to match trades sheet
numbering and information and date shall reflect date of Architect's punch.
1. Record Prints: Two print copies of all record drawings will be required to be turned in
with Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
2. Record Digital Data Files: Files will be required to be saved to CD and included in the
Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Organize digital data information into separate
electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file
with the following format:
a. CMH — POB Expansion — "Sheet Number ".
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017839 017839 - 4
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017900 017900 - 1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
SECTION 017900 — DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training
for products in those Sections.
C. Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the Demonstration and
Training Allowance as specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."
D. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time
spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for
time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. See requirements in
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective
and outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer - produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
B. Qualification Data: For videographer.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
instruction time.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017900 017900 - 2
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance -based test.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of
each training module.
1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of videographer.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Date of video recording.
2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.
Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet
with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of
Project and date of video recording on each page.
3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label
information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to
corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording
on each page.
4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared
and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals including a PDF
electronic file format on compact disc.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating
maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for
this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful
learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory - authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing
demonstration and training events similar to those required.
D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017900 017900 - 3
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
3. Review required content of instruction.
4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions
and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 01 7900 017900 - 4
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. 'Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break -in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
J. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017900 017900 - 5
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational
requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner through Construction Manager with at least seven days'
advance notice.
D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on -site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in- place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training
video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and
demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 017900 017900 - 6
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective
and lesson outline.
B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable
to Owner, on electronic media.
1. Electronic Media: Read -only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with
commercial -grade graphic label.
2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual
table of contents. Provide complete screen -based menu.
3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in
video segment, as identified in Project specifications.
4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for
inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the
following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table
of contents:
a. Name of Contractor/Installer.
b. Business address.
c. Business phone number.
d. Point of contact.
e. E -mail address.
C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.
a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.
b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project
Manual table of contents.
c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,
stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon
commencement of new filming segment.
D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment
markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.
E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video
recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.
F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured
from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.
G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training
modules in same format as recordings of live training.
END OF SECTION
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Four
SECTION 047000 047000 - 1
MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
SECTION 047000 - MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stone masonry adhered to concrete backup.
2. Stone masonry adhered to wood framing and sheathing.
3.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
B. Samples for Verification:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least two Samples in each set and show the full
range of color and other visual characteristics in completed Work.
2. For each color of mortar required. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of
pigments used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone
fitters.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for each type of stone masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long by
72 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a. Include stone coping at top of mockup.
b. Include a sealant - filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 047000 047000 - 2
MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
c. Include through -wall flashing installed for a 24 -inch length in corner of mockup
approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12 -inch length of
flashing left exposed to view (omit stone masonry above half of flashing).
d. Include wood studs, sheathing, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-
veneer wall mockup.
2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather - resistant membrane.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture- resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry
when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone
masonry face.
1. Protect base of walls from rain - splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings spread
on the ground and over the wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.
C. Cold- Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by
frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold- weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 047000 047000 - 3
MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
1. Cold- Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days
after completing cleaning.
•
D. Hot - Weather Requirements: Comply with hot - weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602.
L7 COORDINATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of flashing and
similar items to be built into stone masonry.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Manufactured Stone Veneer: Obtain stone, from single manufacturer
with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each
cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or
producer.
2.2 MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
A. Stone Veneer:
1. Eldorado Stone, Regional Profiles
2. Product: Cobblestone Brown
3. Stone Accents:
a. Texture: Chiseled Edge
b. Color: Buckskin
B. Veneer Unit Properties: Precast veneer units consisting of Portland cement, lightweight
aggregates and mineral oxide pigments.
1. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM 39, 5 sample average: greater than 1800
psi (12.4 MPa).
2. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 50 psi (345 kPa).
3. Water Absorption: Less than 22 percent, unless otherwise noted in OSSC.
4. Freeze -Thaw Test: ASTM C 67: Less than 3 percent weight loss and no disintegration.
5. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177: 0.473 at 1.387 inches thick.
C. Reinforcing: ASTM C 847, 2.5Ib /yd (1.4kg/m galvanized expanded metal lath complying
with code agency requirements for the type of substrate over which stone veneer is installed.
D. Mortar:
1. Cement Cement: Any cement complying with ASTM C 270.
2. Lime: ASTM C 207.
3. Sand: ASTM C 144, natural or manufactured sand.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 047000 047000 - 4
MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
4. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, mineral oxide pigments.
5. Water: Potable.
6. Pre- Packaged Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
E. Bonding Agent: Exterior integral bonding agent meeting ASTM C 932.
F. Sealer: Water based silane or siloxane masonry sealer, clear.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Standard Installation (Grouted Joints):
1. Mix mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270, Type N or S or Eldorado Stone mortar
preparation instructions.
a. Add color pigment in grout joint mortar in accordance with pigment
manufacturer's instructions.
2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
stone masonry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that . contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives.
B. Protection: Protect adjacent work from contact with mortar.
C. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions for the type of substrate being covered.
3.3 INSTALLATION -
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 047000 047000 - 5
MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
A. Install and clean stone in accordance with manufacture's installation instructions for Standard
Installation (Grouted Joint).
B. Apply sealer in accordance with sealer manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements
/ relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable
for intended use.
D. Arrange stones in broken -range ashlar pattern with uniform course heights, random lengths, and
uniform joint widths.
E. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings form adjacent work.
B. Cleaning Veneer Units:
1. Wash with a soft bristle brush and water /granulated detergent solution.
2. Rinse immediately with clean water.
C. Removing Efflorescence:
1. Allow veneer to dry thoroughly.
( 2. Scrub with soft bristle brush and clean water.
3. Rinse immediately with clear water; allow to dry.
4. If efflorescence is still visible, repeat the procedure using a solution of 1 part household
vinegar and 5 parts water.
5. Rinse immediately with clean water.
D. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods
and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups.
4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.
E. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION 04 7000
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Five
SECTION 055213 055213 - 1
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. - Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
2. Section 096900 "Access Flooring" for railings included with access flooring.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 2
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D. Delegated - Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless -steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 /D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
RED ROCK CENTER - PI -LASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 3
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate, installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Pisor Industries, Inc.
b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed)
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 4
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized -Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe /Zn 5 for zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method for railings indicated.
3. Provide tamper- resistant flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Post - Installed Anchors: Torque - controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without
failure, a load equal to six times the Toad imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times
the Toad imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc - plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe /Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to
be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated
items.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI #25.
C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer
complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer.
D. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
E. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.
F. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 5
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
H. Anchoring Cement: Factory- packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic - controlled expansion
cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,
and grouting compound.
1. Water- Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating
and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage; but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
•
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 6
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall- mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or Tess.
M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush -
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside
dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate
forming bottom closure.
P. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip -fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized
for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not
more than one- fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist
being dislodged.
1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing
sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 7
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous -metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer.
2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
D. Shop- Painted Finish:
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. High- Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime -
coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with
requirements in SSPC -PA 1, "Paint .Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by
coating manufacturer.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 8
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 114 inch in 12 feet.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored
to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint
within 6 inches of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout], mixed and placed to comply
with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring
material
D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with l/8 -inch buildup, sloped away from post
E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this
purpose.
2. For stainless -steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
3. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 055213 055213 - 9
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip -fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to
railing ends
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to
railing ends
C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets
with 1 -1/2 -inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate
brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support_structural
loads.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or
lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC -PA 1 for touching up shop - painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting ".
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 055213
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Six
•
SECTION 062013 062013 - 1
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior wood.
2. Hardboard soffits.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Section 0999113 "Exterior Paint" for finishing hardboard soffits.
3. Section 0999300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for exterior wood.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application •
details.
1. Include data for wood - preservative treatment from chemical- treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical -
treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material.
2. Include data for fire- retardant treatment from chemical- treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified.
4. Include copies of warranties from chemical- treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or
textures.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with 1/2 of exposed surface
finished; 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 062013 062013 - 2
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Compliance Certificates:
1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp.
2. For preservative- treated wood that is not marked with treatment - quality mark.
3. For fire- retardant- treated wood that is not marked with classification marking of testing
and inspecting agency.
B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire -
retardant- treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
1. For exterior ornamental wood columns, comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR TRIM
A. Lumber for Clear Finish:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 062013 062013 - 3
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Clear Heart VG (Vertical Grain) NLGA, WCLIB,
or WWPA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent
3. Finger Jointing: Allowed if made with wet -use adhesive complying with ASTM D 5572.
4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to
penetrate not less than 1 -1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1. For face - fastening siding, provide ringed -shank siding nails or hot -dip galvanized -steel
siding nails unless otherwise indicated.
2. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face
fastening is required.
B. Wood Glue: Waterproof resorcinol glue recommended by manufacturer for exterior carpentry
use.
C. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for
flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.
D. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18 -by -16 -inch mesh.
E. Continuous Soffit Vents: Aluminum hat channel shape with stamped louvers, 2 inches wide
and in lengths not less than 96 inches.
1. Net Free Area: 4 sq. in. /linear ft.
2. Finish: Pint to match adjacent finish
F. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and
manufacturer of substrates for intended application.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 600.
c. May National Associates, Inc.
d. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 +.
e. Schnee - Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM 8200.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except members with
ends exposed in finished work.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 062013 062013 - 4
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16 -inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 -inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory
primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 099113
"Exterior Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior
finish carpentry with 1/32 -inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish
carpentry.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
a
SECTION 062013 062013 - 5
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062013
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Seven
SECTION 072100 072100 - 1
THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam - plastic board insulation.
2. Glass -fiber board insulation.
13. Related Sections:
1. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board" for installation in wood- and metal- framed
assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface- Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam - plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam - plastic board materials to
Project site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam - plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072100 072100 - 2
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM - PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 75 and
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products.
2.2 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame - spread
and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to
fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic
spaces and vented eaves.
D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass -fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than
0.05 -ppm formaldehyde.
•
2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self - locking washer
in place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072100 072100 - 3
THERMAL INSULATION
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul- Hangers.
b. Gemco; Spindle Type.
2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
3. Spindle: Copper- coated, low- carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B. Adhesively Attached, Angle- Shaped, Spindle -Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting
spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with
self - locking washer in place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Gemco; 90- Degree Insulation Hangers.
2. Angle: Formed from 0.030 -inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet with
each leg 2 inches square.
3. Spindle: Copper- coated, low- carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
•
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
ID B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been Left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072100 072100 - 4
THERMAL INSULATION
B. Foam - Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Glass -Fiber or Mineral -Wool, Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing
members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3 -inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at
vented eaves.
5. For metal - framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
6. For wood- framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling
flanges to sides of framing members.
b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is
installed over it.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072500 072500 - 1
WEATHER BARRIERS
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building paper.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061 600 "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
2. Section 072726 "Fluid- Applied Membrane Air Barrier" 072713 for air barrier applied
over wall sheathing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For building wrap, include data on air and water -vapor permeance based on testing
according to referenced standards.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For water - resistive barrier, from ICC -ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER- RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt- saturated organic felt), unperforated.
B. Building Paper: Water- vapor - permeable, asphalt- saturated kraft building paper.
1. Water vapor transmission not less than 35 g/sq. m x 24 hr per ASTM D 779.
2. Water resistance not less than 20 minute per ASTM F 1249.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072500 072500 - 2
WEATHER BARRIERS
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self - adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized - asphalt compound, bonded to a high - density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. DuPont (E. 1. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl
Self Adhered Flashing.
c. Protecto Wrap Company; BT -25 XL.
d. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield.
e. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind -o -wrap.
f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW- 705 -TWF Thru -Wall Flashing.
g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500.
h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 25
i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus
Self - Adhered Flashing
j. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap.
k. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard JT -20 Tape
I. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Presto -Seal.
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for
substrate.
C. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER- RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water - resistive barrier securely fastened to
framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
B. Cover sheathing with water- resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion -
or control joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 -inch overlap unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2 -inch overlap and a 6 -inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 1I SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072500 072500 - 3
WEATHER BARRIERS
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over water- resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
4. Lap water - resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure
that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
END OF SECTION 072500
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
®'
SECTION 072726 072726 - 1
FLUID- APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
SECTION 072726 - FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fluid - applied, vapor - permeable membrane air barriers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint- and - penetration
treatments.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Air - Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of
air.
B. Air - Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
C. Air - Barrier Assembly: The collection of air- barrier materials and accessory materials applied to
an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement
through the wall.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.
B. Shop Drawings: For air- barrier assemblies.
1. Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks,
counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie -ins
with adjoining construction.
2. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072726 072726 - 2
FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: From air - barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and
accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the
barrier.
C. Product Test Reports: For each air - barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program
and shall employ ABAA - certified installers and supervisors on Project.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly 150 sq. ft. incorporating backup wall
construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties
and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint
treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations
of air - barrier assembly.
a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection by Owner's testing
agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.
b. Include junction with roofing membrane building corner condition and foundation
wall intersection.
c. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct
mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072726 072726 - 3
FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by air - barrier manufacturer.
1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air - barrier performance.
2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air - barrier materials and air - barrier accessories from single
source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor permeable air
barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental
condensation or water penetration. Air - barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating
substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material
changes, penetrations and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air
leakage exceeding specified limits.
2.3 VAPOR - PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR- BARRIER
A. Fluid- Applied, Vapor - Permeable Membrane Air Barrier.
1. Products: Basis of design:
a. StoGuard Emerald Coat:
1) Sto Gold Fill
2) Sto Emerald Coat
3) StoGard Rapid Seal
4) StoGuard Tape
5) StoGaurd Primer
6) StoGuard Mesh
7) StoGuard Fabric
8) StoGuard RediCorner
2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Perneance: Maximum 0.004 cfm /sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57- lbf /sq. ft.
pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Vapor Perneance: Minimum 10 permsASTM E 96/E 96M.
c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072726 072726 - 4
FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air - barrier manufacturer to produce a complete
air - barrier assembly and compatible with primary air - barrier material.
2.5 DRAINAGE BOARD
A. Drainage board:
1. Products: Basis of design:
1) MTI Sure Cavity Rainscreen Drainage Plane
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other
contaminants.
2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air -
barrier manufacturer.
3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for air - barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form- release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film- forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate - patching membrane.
E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and
edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072726 072726 - 5
FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another
with stainless -steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous
support for air barrier.
3.3 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to
ASTM C 1193 and air - barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.
1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air - barrier manufacturer's recommended
preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks.
Apply a double thickness of fluid air - barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip
in preparation coat.
B. Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1 193 and air -
barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air - barrier material at
joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of
fluid air - barrier material over joint reinforcing strip.
3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION
A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air - barrier
manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a
continuous air barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base
flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will
be covered by fluid air - barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
1. Prime glass - fiber- surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
C. Connect and seal exterior wall air - barrier material continuously to roofing- membrane air
barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to -floor construction, exterior glazing and
window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door
framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.
D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with
termination mastic.
E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air - barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended
application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within
these temperature ranges.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 072726 072726 - 6
FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply adhesive - coated transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of
coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to
perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
1. Adhesive - Coated Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install
flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches o.c. Apply lap sealant over
exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.
3. Preformed Silicone - Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls,
frame, and air- barrier material.
G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air - barrier material with foam sealant.
H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with
termination mastic.
I. Seal top of through -wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6- inch -wide, counterflashing
strip.
J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by
metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and
flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired
areas in strip direction.
3.5 FLUID AIR- BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply fluid air - barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to
achieve a continuous air barrier according to air- barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply fluid air - barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature
ranges.
1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air - barrier material on same day.
Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
3. Prime glass - fiber- surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air- barrier membrane to substrates
according to the following thickness. Apply air - barrier membrane in full contact around
protrusions such as masonry ties.
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air - barrier components.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 072726 072726 - 7
FLUID- APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air - barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required
by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and
replace air barrier or install additional, full- thickness, air- barrier application after
repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air - barrier
manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by
air - barrier manufacturer.
B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work
using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
C. Remove masking materials after installation.
END OF SECTION 072726
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 074600 074600 - 1
SIDING
SECTION 074600 - SIDING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiber - cement siding and fiber- cement trim
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathing and weather - resistive barriers.
3. Section 062013 "Exterior Finish Carpentry" for wood and for exterior trim.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.
1. 8 -inch- long -by- actual -width Sample of siding with trim and accessories.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding and related accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Labeling: Provide fiber- cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by
a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups for siding including accessories.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 074600 074600 - 2
SIDING
a. Size: 48 inches long by 60 inches high
b. Include outside corner on one end of mockup and inside corner on other end.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
•
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials in a dry, well- ventilated, weathertight place.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that
fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including cracking, deforming and fading.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by
manufacturer, of more than 4 Hunter color- difference units as measured according to
ASTM D 2244.
3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER- CEMENT SIDING
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber- cement board, noncombustible when tested
according to ASTM E 136; with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:
a. James Hardie.
2. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 6 -1/4 to 6 -1/2 inches wide with plain style.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05 1 83.01
SECTION 074600 074600 - 3
SIDING
a. Texture: Select Cedarmill.
b. Color: Iron Gray and Chestnut Brown (see elevations for locations)
2.2 * FIBER - CEMENT TRIM
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade I1, fiber- cement board, noncombustible when tested
according to ASTM E 136; with a flame - spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:
a. James Hardie.
2. Trim Pattern: Trim boards 1 inch thick.
a. Texture: Select Rustic.
b. Color: Iron Gray and Chestnut Brown (see elevations and details for locations)
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps,
and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.
1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Flashing: Provide flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at
window and door heads and where indicated.
C. Fasteners:
1. For fastening fiber cement, use hot -dip galvanized fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding and related accessories.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 074600 074600 - 4
SIDING
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Do not install damaged components.
2. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal
movement.
B. Install fiber- cement siding and related accessories.
1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c.
C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a
weathertight installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new
materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 074600
0
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 1
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mechanically fastened TPO membrane roofing system.
2. Roof insulation.
B. Related Sections:
l . Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wood - based, structural -use roof deck panels.
3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counterflashings.
4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.
B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane
roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE /SEI 7.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 2
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials
that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.
E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not Tess than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based
on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR
"Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low -slope roof products.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing
and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for comer, perimeter, and field -of -roof locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T- shaped side and end lap seam.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Walkway pads or rolls.
4. Metal termination bars.
5. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
6. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.
D. Field quality- control reports.
E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
• JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 3
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is for membrane roofing system
identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
C. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: ASTM E 108; for application and roof slopes indicated, as
determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
D. Fire - Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire- resistance -rated roof assemblies
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 4
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without moneta ry limitation, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners,
substrate board, roofing accessories, roof pavers, and other components of membrane
roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of
membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the
following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Fabric - Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim
reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Custom Seal Roofing.
c. Firestone Building Products Company.
d. GAF Materials Corporation.
e. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
f. Johns Manville.
g. Mule -Hide Products Co., Inc.
h. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics.
i. Versico Incorporated.
2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: White
2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer
for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
RED ROCK CENTER -PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 5
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,
55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless -steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum- zinc - alloy- coated or zinc- coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
G. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion -
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination
reglets, and other accessories.
2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, Type X gypsum board, 5/8 inch thick.
B. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion -
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof
deck.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of
0.13 perm.
1. Tape: Pressure - sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Approvals approved for vapor -
retarder application.
2.5 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by TPO membrane roofing
manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated.
B. Extruded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. minimum
density, square edged.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 6
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion -
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
2.7 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory- formed, nonporous, heavy -duty, slip- resisting, surface - textured
walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing
system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and
that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."
4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
6. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components
to roof deck have been removed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 075423 075423 - 7
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
D. Install acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Section 053100 "Steel Decking,"
according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions, immediately before
installation of overlying construction and to remain dry.
3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM
Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified
Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners,
perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does
not restrict flow of water.
3.5 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
1. For in- splice attachment, install membranes roofing with long dimension perpendicular to
steel roof deck flutes.
B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 8
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
D. Mechanically fasten or adhere membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and
perimeter of roofing.
E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
F. In -Seam Attachment: Secure one edge of TPO sheet using fastening plates or metal battens
centered within membrane seam and mechanically fasten TPO sheet to roof deck.
G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot -air weld side and end laps of
membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet membrane.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in
place with clamping ring.
I. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain
weathertightness of transition.
3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field- formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot -air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 075423 075423 - 9
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner. •
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 075423
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 1
SHEET METAL ROOFING
SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standing -seam metal roofing, custom fabricated.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for roof insulation and sheet vapor retarders
separate from self - adhering underlayments.
2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts and flashings
that are not part of sheet metal roofing.
3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for manufactured roof accessories.
4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field- applied sealants adjoining sheet metal roofing.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof
panels, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal
roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories shall comply with requirements
indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects
in construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements from
ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
C. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based
on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 2
SHEET METAL ROOFING
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal roofing, including
plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and
field- assembled work. Include the following:
1. Details for forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions.
2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal roofing, including layout of fasteners, cleats,
clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
4. Details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.
5. Details of roof penetrations.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
9. Detail the following accessory items, at a scale of not less than 1 -1/2 inches per 12
inches:
a. Flashing and trim.
b. Gutters and downspouts as they relate to adjacent sheet metal roofing.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal roofing indicated, with factory-
- applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and
in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips and other attachments.
2. Trim and Metal Closures: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and
other exposed accessories.
3. Other Accessories: 12 -inch- long Samples for each type of other accessory.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing sheet metals and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Custom - Fabricated Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled
workers who custom fabricate sheet metal roofing similar to that required for this Project and
whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.
B. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER ADO5 ] 83.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 3
SHEET METAL ROOFING
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave including fascia and soffit as shown on
Drawings; approximately 48 inches square by full thickness, including
attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause
staining, . denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal roofing materials away from
uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal roofing from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal roofing installation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are
specified in other Sections.
B. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of
sheathing, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Warranty form at the end of this Section in which Installer agrees to repair
or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including but not limited to rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Wrinkling or buckling.
c. Loose parts.
d. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage.
e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering, including non - uniformity of color or finish.
f. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 1I SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 4
SHEET METAL ROOFING
B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Basis of Design Product:
1. Manufacturer: Taylor Commercial Products
2. Series: Versa Span Structural Standing Seam
3. Material: 24 guage Kynar 500
4. Color: Colonial Red
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts: ASTM D 226Type I (No. 15), asphalt- saturated organic felts.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system
and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular- threaded nails, self - tapping screws, self - locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. General:
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps
or factory- applied coating.
b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self - drilling screws, gasketed,
with hex - washer head.
c. Blind Fasteners: High - strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 5
SHEET METAL ROOFING
2. Fasteners for Zinc - Coated Steel Sheet: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM F 2329, or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50
percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure - sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by portable
roll - forming equipment manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofing and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single - component, solvent - release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold - applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofing
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal
roofing unless otherwise indicated.
B. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, TPO pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics
of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest
extent possible.
1. Standing -Seam Roofing: Form standing -seam panels with finished seam height of 1 -1/2
inches.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of installation to a
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within I/8 -inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work
sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Where lapped expansion
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 6
SHEET METAL ROOFING
provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than
1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable; nonexpansion -type joints are indicated or required to produce
weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self - adhering sheet
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by
fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact.
G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop
fabrication.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form
seams, and solder.
3. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use.
4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within
flatness tolerances required for finished roofing installation.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely
anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations
through sheet metal roofing.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 7
SHEET METAL ROOFING
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
C. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify
actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before
installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Use
adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal
roofing. Apply at locations indicated, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not
less than 2 inches.
1. Apply from eave to ridge.
2. Apply on roof not covered by self - adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges of self -
adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water.
B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
C. Apply slip sheet before installing sheet metal roofing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods,
protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a
complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at only one location for each
panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction.
C. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1 - 1/4 inches
for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by
applying self - adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by SMACNA.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F. Fasciae: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips where fasciae meet soffits, along
lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 8
SHEET METAL ROOFING
3.4 CUSTOM - FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form
exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering
temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of
solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed
edges unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with two fasteners
to prevent rotation.
2. Fasten cleats not more than 12 inches o.c. Bend tabs over fastener head.
3. Provide expansion -type cleats and clips for roof panels that exceed 30 feet in length.
B. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes
or less, use cleats at transverse seams.
1. Where sealant - filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than
1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant -type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
C. Rivets: Rivet joints in zinc where indicated and where necessary for strength.
D. Standing -Seam Roofing: Attach standing -seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, double
fastened at 12 inches o.c. Install panels reaching from eave to ridge before moving to adjacent
panels. Before panels are interlocked, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of
lower panel. Lock standing seams by folding over twice so cleat and panel edges are
completely engaged.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,
copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips,
and similar items.
2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Section 076200
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076100 076100 - 9
SHEET METAL ROOFING
1. Install flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases,
framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
2. Install continuous strip of self - adhering underlayment at edge of continuous flashing
overlapping self - adhering underlayment, where "continuous seal strip" is indicated in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," and where indicated on Drawings.
3. Install exposed flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and
weather- resistant performance.
4. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would
not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, and filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.
C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and sheet metal roofing. Fasten and seal
to sheet metal roofing as recommended by SMACNA.
D. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases
where they meet sheet metal roofing.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerances specified
in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing is installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of
sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal roofing
manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal roofing in a clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076100
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076200 076200 - 1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured Products:
a. Manufactured through -wall flashing.
b. Manufactured reglets.
2. Formed Products:
a. Formed steep -slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
b. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set -on -type curbs, equipment supports, roof
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
3. Section 079500 "Expansion Control" for manufactured sheet metal expansion joint
covers.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field- assembled work. Include the following:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076200 076200 - 2
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
I. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5. Details of expansion joints and expansion joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not Tess than 1 -1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory
indicated with factory- applied color finishes involving color selection.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in- service performance.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
C. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook."
Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076200 076200 - 3
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of
factory - applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
J PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip
process and prepainted by the coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
( 1. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating
■ designation, Grade 40; structural quality.
2. Surface: Smooth, flat and mill phosphatized for field painting.
3. Color: Paint to match adjacent material finish color.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076200 076200 - 4
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of I/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal .Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
I. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- long sections. Furnish flat -
stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size
recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion
joints, expansion joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
1. Gutter Style: D
2. Expansion Joints: Lap type
3. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with
metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1. Fabricated Hanger Style: SMACNA figure designation 1 -35B.
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 1I SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076200 076200 - 5
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless -steel sheet metal flashing and trim
with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or
cementitious construction.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 076200 076200 - 6
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not Tess than 1 -1/4
inches for nails and not Tess than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant - filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than
1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant -type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed
with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored
straps spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with
sealant. Slope to downspouts.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 -1/2 -inch telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate
•
hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
3. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 076200 076200 - 7
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of
roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3 -inch centers.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ".
D. Roof - Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof - penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to
pipes that penetrate roof.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances
specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 077200 077200 - 1
ROOF ACCESSORIES
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof hatches.
2. Pipe supports.
3. Roof walkways.
4. Preformed flashing sleeves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs
for access to roof hatches.
2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for safety railing systems not attached to roof -
hatch curbs.
3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field- formed metal
flashing, roof - drainage systems, roof expansion joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet
metal trim and accessories.
4. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops,
gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.
5. Section 077129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for manufactured roof expansion -
joint covers.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments
to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between
plant- and field- assembled work.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 077200 077200 - 2
ROOF ACCESSORIES
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on
Samples of size to adequately show color.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of
factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.
1. Baked - Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply
with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for
type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 1I SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 077200 077200 - 3
ROOF ACCESSORIES
C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanized -Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot -dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C,726, thickness as indicated.
C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1 -1/2 inches thick.
D. Underlayment:
1. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 -lb /100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
E. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and
metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Fasteners for Zinc- Coated or Aluminum -Zinc Alloy- Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless
steel or hot -dip zinc - coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300 stainless
steel.
4. Fasteners for Stainless -Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or
silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory
manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single- component, solvent - release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
2.3 ROOF HATCH
A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof -hatch units with lids and insulated double - walled curbs, welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid -to -curb counterflashing and
weathertight perimeter gasketing, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof
insulation, and integrally formed deck - mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 077200 077200 - 4
ROOF ACCESSORIES
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. AES Industries, Inca
b. Babcock - Davis.
c. Bilco Company (The).
d. Bristolite Skylights.
e. Custom. Solution Roof and Metal Products.
f. Dur -Red Products.
g. Hi Pro International, Inc.
h. J. L. Industries, Inc.
i. Metallic Products Corp.
j. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
k. Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group (The).
1. Nystrom.
m. O'Keeffe's Inc.
n. Pate Company (The).
o. Precision Ladders, LLC.
B. Type and Size: Single -leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches
C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20- lbf /sq. ft. internal uplift load.
D. Hatch Material: Zinc- coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.
1. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
E. Construction:
1. Insulation: Cellulosic -fiber board.
2. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal
liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
3. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof
profile.
5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
F. Hardware: Galvanized -steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle -type hinge system,
and padlock - hasps inside and outside.
G. Ladder - Assist Post: Roof -hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof - access
ladder.
1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to
closed position.
2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.
3. Material: Steel tube
4. Post: 1 -5/8 -inch diameter pipe.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 077200 077200 - 5
ROOF ACCESSORIES
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES
A. Exhaust Vent Flashing: Double - walled metal flashing sleeve or boot, insulation filled, with
integral deck flange, 12 inches high, with removable metal hood and slotted or perforated metal
collar.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
b. Thaler Metal USA Inc.
2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.
3. Diameter: As required.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard
B. Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
b. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
c. Thaler Metal USA Inc.
2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick
3. Height: As required
4. Diameter: As required.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed td minimize contrast.
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 077200 077200 - 6
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs
in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each
other.
E. Roof -Hatch Installation:
1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level.
2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
hani and hardware.
3. Attach saf ety railing system to roof -hatch curb.
4. Attach ladder- assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 077200 077200 - 7
ROOF ACCESSORIES
F. Preformed Flashing- Sleeve Installation: Secure flashing sleeve to roof membrane according to
flashing- sleeve manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077200
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 1I SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 079200 079200 - 1
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Latex joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
I. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated.
B. Joint - Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint - sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint - sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint - sealant formulation.
4. Joint - sealant color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements
specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, adhesion -in -peel, and indentation hardness.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 079200 079200 - 2
JOINT SEALANTS
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -
sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint- sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint- sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
l . Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or. other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint- sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Clear.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 079200 079200 - 3
JOINT SEALANTS
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single- Component, Nonsag, Neutral - Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290
d. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS
e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil -C990.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 600.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600
d. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 +.
e. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; SM'8200.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A .
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 079200 079200 - 4
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
(
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Stucco
c. Painted Wood Trim
3. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass. •
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint- sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 079200 079200 - 5
JOINT SEALANTS
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C l 193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Eight
SECTION 081113 081113 - 1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow -metal work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow -metal doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM -HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire- resistance
ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.
2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 081113 081113 - 2
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory- applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5
inches.
E. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow -metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory- finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow -metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum
4 -inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to
permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld International, LLC.
2. Apex Industries, Inc.
3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc.
5. Concept Frames, Inc.
6. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
7. Custom Metal Products.
8. Daybar.
9. Deansteel.
10. de La Fontaine Industries.
11, DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc.
12. Door Components, Inc.
13. Fleming -Baron Door Products. •
14. Gensteel Doors Inc.
15. Greensteel Industries, Ltd.
16. HMF Express.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 081113 081113 - 3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
17. Hollow Metal Inc.
18. Hollow Metal Xpress.
19. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc.
20. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.
21. L.I.F. Industries, Inc.
22. LaForce, Inc.
23. Megamet Industries, Inc.
24. Mesker Door Inc.
25. Michbi Doors Inc.
26. MPI Group, LLC (The).
27. National Custom Hollow Metal.
28. North American Door Corp.
29. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The).
30. Pioneer Industries, Inc. •
31. Premier Products, Inc.
32. Republic Doors and Frames.
33. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
34. Security Metal Products Corp.
35. Shanahans Manufacturing Ltd.
36. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
37. Steward Steel; Door Division.
38. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.
39. Titan Metal Products, Inc.
40. Trillium Steel Doors Limited.
41. West Central Mfg. Inc.
2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B. Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM -HMMA 861.
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic- coated, cold - rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam.
e. Core: Steel stiffened.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic- coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch for door
openings 48 inches or less, or window frames; minimum thickness of 0.067
inchfor door openings greater than 48 inches.
b. Materials: Metallic- coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
c. Construction: Face welded.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 081113 081113 - 4
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW -METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B. Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM -HMMA 861.
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic- coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with
minimum G60A60 coating.
d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam.
e. Core: Steel stiffened.
1) Thermal -Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal- resistance
value (R- value) of not less than 19 R -value when tested according to
ASTM C 1363.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic- coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with
minimum G60A60 coating.
b. Construction: Face welded. 0
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
•
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 081 113 081113 - 5
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Power- Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow -metal frames of type indicated.
G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type 1 (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame- spread and smoke -
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
J. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness
per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,
and other deleterious impurities.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow -Metal Doors:
1. Steel - Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical
stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full -door height, with vertical webs
spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c.
Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral -fiber insulation.
2. Vertical Edges for Single- Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at
manufacturer's discretion.
3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide
flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets.
4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of
weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
6. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire- performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 081113 081113 - 6
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with
published listing of qualified testing agency.
C. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
I • Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated
from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt
welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip -on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at
bottoms of jambs.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted
in metal -stud partitions.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather- stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers
as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
8. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45- degree angle
cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of
frame with welded -steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION081113 081113 -7
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface - mounted door
hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free primer
complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field- applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
13. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built -in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface - mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM -HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 081113 081113 - 8
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power- actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral -fiber
insulation.
6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
7. In -Place Metal or Wood -Stud Partitions: Secure slip -on drywall frames in place
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
•
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non - Fire -Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 081113 081113 - 9
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke - Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying, rust - inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic- Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Factory- Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory
finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in
painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 081113
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 083113 083113 - 1
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Access doors and frames for walls.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.
C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.
D. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Access Panel Solutions.
2. Acudor Products, Inc.
3. Alfab, Inc.
4. Babcock - Davis.
5. Cendrex Inc.
6. Elmdor /Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
7. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan- Nutone, LLC.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 1I SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 083113 083113 - 2
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
8. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
9. Karp Associates, Inc.
10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
1 1. Maxam Metal Products Limited.
12. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp.
13. MIFAB, Inc.
14. Milcor Inc.
15. Nystrom, Inc.
16. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
B. Exterior Flush Access Doors:
1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to be weatherproof and fit flush to frame. Provide
manufacturer's standard 2 -inch- thick fiberglass insulation and extruded door gaskets.
Provide manufacturer's standard -width frame for surface mounting, proportional to door
size.
2. Locations: Wall; entry from roof to rotunda
3. Door Size: 36" x 36"
4. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage
a. Finish: Factory finish.
5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door
6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard
7. Hardware: Lock.
C. Hardware:
1. Lock: Cylinder
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold - rolled steel
sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
D. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
E. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 083113 083113 - 3
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1. For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self - furring expanded metal lath attached to
door panel.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic
grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Steel and Metallic- Coated -Steel Finishes:
1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free,
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat,
with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.
E. Stainless -Steel Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 083113 083113 - 4
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
3. Bright, Cold - Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 1
ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior storefront framing.
2. Storefront framing for punched openings.
3. Exterior manual -swing entrance doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum - framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
d. Glazing -to- glazing contact.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
g. Sealant failure.
h. Failure of operating units.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
0
SECTION 084113 084113 - 2
ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum- framed systems, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph
b. Importance Factor: I
c. Exposure Category: B.
2. Seismic Loads: Occupancy Category II, Site Class D, Seismic Design Category D, Ss =
0.951, S 1= 0.340, Sds = 0.710, Sd I = 0.390
D. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to [edge of glass in a direction perpendicular
to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing
lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch,
whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,
whichever is smaller.
E. Structural -Test Performance: Provide aluminum- framed systems tested according to
ASTM E 330 as follows:
•1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum- framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static- air - pressure difference of 1.57 lbf /sq. ft.
G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum - framed systems that do not
evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind -load design
pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf /sq. ft.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum- framed systems
or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other
than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and
gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or
finishes.
H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum - framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 3
ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg Fmaterial surfaces.
2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal -
surface temperature of 180 deg F.
b. Low Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: 0 deg F.
3. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum- framed systems with fixed glazing and framing
areas having condensation- resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
J. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum- framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas
having an average U- factor of not more than 0.57 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according
to AAMA 1503.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum -
framed systems.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum- framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical -to- horizontal intersection of aluminum - framed systems,
made from 12 -inch lengths of full -size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
E. Other Action Submittals:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 4
ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door
hardware.
F. Delegated- Design Submittal: For aluminum- framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum- framed systems.
2. Include design calculations.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum- framed systems, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for aluminum - framed systems, indicating compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Source quality- control reports.
G. Quality- Control Program for Structural- Sealant - Glazed System: Include reports.
H. Field quality- control reports.
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum- framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 5
ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum- framed systems, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems
similar to those indicated for this Project.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in- service performance.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data -
to Architect for review.
E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
F. Source Limitations for Aluminum - Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer.
G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural
Welding Code - Aluminum."
1.9 PROJECT.CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum- framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum- framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 6
ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware:
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months'
full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include
quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door
hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as
those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Arcadia, Inc.
2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
3. CMI ArchitecturalCommercial Architectural Products, Inc.
4. EFCO Corporation.
5. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
6. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.
7. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
8. TRACO.
9. Tubelite.
10. United States Aluminum.
11. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
12. YKK AP America Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10 /A5.10M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion - resistant primer, complying
with SSPC -PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 084113 084113 - 7
ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-
SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold- Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M.
3. Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded - aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides
3. Glazing Plane: As indicated.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high - strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self - locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast -iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing" and shown on drawings
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded,
of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing operation.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 8
ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
1. Door Construction: 2 -inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.188 -inch thick, extruded -
aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing
brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie
rods.
2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5 -inch nominal width.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
above floor or ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap -on, extruded - aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum - framed systems, as specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied, asphalt- mastic paint complying with SSPC -Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 9
ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single -door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding -type weather stripping retained in adjustable
strip and mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory - installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings. •
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
1. Color: Dark bronze.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
at RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 10
ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field- Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface - mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
1-1. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce
weathertight installation.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install aluminum - framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet;
1/4 inch over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of
installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 1I SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 084113 084113 - 11
ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test
results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.
1. Structural- Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested
according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401.
a. Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," in ASTM C 1401,
Appendix X2, shall be used.
1) A minimum of two areas on each building face shall be tested.
2) Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
2. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for
laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09
cfm /sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static -
air- pressure difference of 1.57 lbf /sq. ft.
3. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum
uniform and cyclic static - air - pressure difference of 0.67 times the static- air - pressure
difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but
not less than 4.18 Ibf /sq. ft. and shall not evidence water penetration.
4. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of
75 feet by 1 story of aluminum - framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested
according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Aluminum- framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-
. second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70- degree open position to 3 inches
from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION 084113
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 085113 085113 - 1
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 084113 "Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish
among aluminum fenestration units.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum
windows.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens,
operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant
installation.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory- applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, showing full range
of color variations for finishes, and prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches
2. Exposed Hardware: Full -size units.
F. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 085113 085113 - 2
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
C. Field quality- control reports.
D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that
meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by
test reports, and calculations.
13. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and
air infiltration.
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering.
e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. All Seasons Window & Door Mfg., Inc.; All Seasons Commercial Division, Inc.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 085113 085113 - 3
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
2. Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing.
3. Custom Window Company.
4. DeSCo Architectural Inc.
5. EFCO Corporation; a Pella company.
6. EXTECH Exterior Technologies, Inc.
7. Fleetwood Windows & Doors.
8. Gerkin Windows and Doors.
9. Graham Architectural Products Corp.
10. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
11. Mannix Exterior Wall Systems, Inc.
12. Peerless Products Inc.
13. Quaker Windows Products Co.Thermal Windows, Inc.
14. TRACO.
15. Wausau Window and Wall Systems.
16. Winco.
17. YKK AP America Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA /CSA 101/1.S.2/A440 for definitions and
minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window.
B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1. Minimum Performance Class: CW
C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole - window U- factor of 0.35 Btu /sq. ft. x h x
deg F.
D. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole- window SHGC of 0.40.
E. Condensation- Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal
performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45.
F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky
heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces .
G. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than 26 STC when tested for laboratory
sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 085113 0851 13 - 4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
H. Outside - Inside Transmission Class (OITC): Rated for not less than 26 OITC when tested for
laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.
I. Windborne- Debris Resistance: Capable of resisting impact from windborne debris based on
testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing
information in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1. Fixed.
B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with
AAMA /WDMA /CSA 101 /I.S.2 /A440.
1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an
integral, concealed, low- conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials
and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal -
to -metal contact.
C. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum,
stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion- resistant material
compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely
lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
D. Weather Stripping: Provide full - perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and
other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.
C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
E. Provide water -shed members above side - hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water
penetration.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 085113 085113 - 5
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors
for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and
provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as
indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of
window units.
G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory
to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Class 1, Color Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying
with AAMA 611.
1. Color: Dark bronze, typical.
2. Color: Black, where in the drawings.
PART3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 085113 085113 - 6
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built -in
components to ensure weathertight window installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,
and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in
manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall
be performed according to AAMA 502.
2. Air - Infiltration Testing:
a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with
AAMA /WDMA /CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.
b. Allowable Air- Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable
AAMA /WDMA /CSA 101 /I.S.2 /A440 rate for product type and performance class
rounded down to one decimal place.
C. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 085113 085113 - 7
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for
smooth operation and weathertight closure.
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances:
1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. if contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 085113
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 1
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"
2. Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" for access door hardware.
3. Section 084113 "Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts"
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below.
Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements
of this Section.
1. Permanente lock cores to be installed by Owner.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type required, in each finish
specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Tag Samples with full description for
coordination with the door hardware schedule. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with,
submission of door hardware schedule.
1. Sample Size: Full -size units or minimum 2 -by -4 -inch Samples for sheet and 4 -inch long
Samples for other products.
a. Full -size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and
remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may,
after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of
keying requirements.
C. Other Action Submittals:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 2
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions
of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door
hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the
fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as
in the Contract Documents.
c. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross - referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and
interfaces with other building control systems.
5) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7) Mounting locations for door hardware.
8) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and
frame.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include
final hardware schedule.
B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:
1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 3
DOOR HARDWARE
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do
not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility
Guidelines.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf
2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements:
a. Interior, Non - Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch high.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the
leading edge of the door.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door
hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with
each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor- recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast
anchoring inserts into concrete.
B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frarnes, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 4
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies
that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in
this Section.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated on drawings. Products are identified by
using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated on drawings
2.2 HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template - produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow -
metal doors and hollow -metal frames.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 5
DOOR HARDWARE
• a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120 -inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum
overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw
locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.
B. Continuous, Gear -Type Hinges: Extruded - aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a
continuous extruded - aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self - lubricating thrust bearings.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: 3/8" minimum.
C. Lock Backset: 2 -3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lock Trim:
1. Description: As indicated on Drawings
2. Levers: Solid.
E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended
to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
2.5 SURFACE BOLTS
A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on [Drawings] [schedule] or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
b. Don -Jo Mfg., Inc.
c. Door Controls International, Inc.
d. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
e. Trimco.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 6
DOOR HARDWARE
2.6 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4 -inch throw; designed for mortising into
door edge.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
2.7 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
2.8 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel
silver.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; permanent cores that are interchangeable; face
finished to match lockset.
C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.9 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack - and - pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key- operated valves and forged -steel main arm. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable
to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
2.10 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall- and Floor - Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 7
DOOR HARDWARE
2.11 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length
for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or
flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by
manufacturer.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. National Guard Products.
2.12 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. National Guard Products.
2.13 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050 -inch- stainless steel; with
manufacturer's standard machine or self - tapping screw fasteners.
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
b. Trimco.
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade
name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as
otherwise approved by Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming
method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and
hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware
units and BHMA A156.18.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not
permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 8
DOOR HARDWARE
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow -metal doors.
3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and
elsewhere as indicated.
2.15 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance. l
B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights specified by manufacturer unless
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have
been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 9
DOOR HARDWARE
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30.
inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for
door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
I . Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
1. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in
each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely
from an open position of 30 degrees.
2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage
lock bolt.
3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: At time of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware
Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 087100 087100 - 10
DOOR HARDWARE
operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door
hardware.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
(
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 087100
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 1
GLAZING
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
• A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Storefront framing.
4. Glazed entrances.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 084126 "All -Glass Entrances and Storefronts."
2. Section 085113 "Aluminum Windows"
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets
to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to
ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:
1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind • pressures applicable to Project
according to ASCE /SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 2
GLAZING
b. Importance Factor: 1
c. Exposure Category: B.
2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center -of -glass
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1
inch, whichever is less.
3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass liter.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants and colored spacers, in 12 -inch lengths.[ t
Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining
framing system.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Delegated - Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain all glass from single source from single manufacturer for
each glass type.
B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these ,
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG -1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR -A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB -3001, "Guidelines for Sloped
Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 3
GLAZING
D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification .label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
E. Fire - Protection -Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire- protection -rated glazing with
certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other
openings, whether or not glazing passes hose - stream test, whether or not glazing has a
temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire- resistance rating in minutes.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in
which coated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within,
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. All glass types are noted in window schedule.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
OD
SECTION 088000 088000 - 4
GLAZING
2.2 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral- skinned neoprene gaskets
complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal.
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure - glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
C. Lock -Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock - strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral - curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290.
d. Pecora Corporation; 890.
e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil -C990.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral- curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 5
GLAZING
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800
d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295.
e. Pecora Corporation; 864
f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -641.
g. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil -C995.
h. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2
D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral - curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN
d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -631. •
e. Schnee - Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM5731 Poly -Glaze Plus.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG
E. Glazing Sealant: Acid - curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; OmniPlus.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 1200..
c. Dow Corning Corporation; 999 -A.
d. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Contractors SCS1000.
e. May National Associates, Inc.; Sil 100 GC
f. Pecora Corporation; 860.
g. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI -601.
h. Schnee - Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM5732 Polyglaze.
i. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze
F. Glazing Sealants for Fire -Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing
agencies that listed and labeled fire- resistant glazing products with which they are used for
applications and fire- protection ratings indicated.
2.4 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl- based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 6
GLAZING
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
. 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Clean -cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt - glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 7
GLAZING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass - framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 8
GLAZING
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge- shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge- shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 9
GLAZING
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
ao C. Installation with Drive -in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure - Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure -
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. .Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 088000 088000 - 10
GLAZING
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088000
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Nine
.
SECTION 092216 092216 - 1
NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
SECTION 092216 - NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non -load- bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and
runners.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
0
SECTION 092216 092216 - 2
NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
1. Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide
lateral bracing.
2. Double- Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2 -inch- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
. runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
E. Cold - Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053 -inch minimum base -metal thickness, with
minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inches, 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel.
F. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 24 guage
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Configuration: hat shaped.
H. Cold - Rolled Furring'Channels: 0.053 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch-
wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated -steel thickness of 0.033 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- diameter wire.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- diameter wire,
or double strand of 0.048 -inch- diameter wire.
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
C. Carrying Channels: Cold- rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053
inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092216 092216 - 3
NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold- Rolled Channels: 0.053 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch-
wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
4. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
a. Configuration: hat shaped.
•
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames,
cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092216 092216 - 4
NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non - load - bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single -Layer Application: as indicated in drawings
2. Multilayer Application: as indicated in drawings
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished •
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire - Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire- resistance -rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance -
rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE I1 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092216 092216 - 5
NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder- driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling •
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
D. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 092216
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 092400 092400 - 1
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring included in portland
cement plaster assemblies.
2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing and water- resistant barriers included in
portland cement plaster assemblies.
3. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders included
in portland cement plaster assemblies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of colored finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and
prepared on rigid backing.
D. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.
2. , For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092400 092400 - 2
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
1.5, PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Exterior Plasterwork:
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use
procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings,
and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.
2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F.
3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has
occurred.
C. Factory- Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
environmental conditions for applying finishes.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL LATH
A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc
coating.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.
b. CEMCO.
c. Clark Western Building Systems.
d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
e. MarinoWARE.
f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Metal Accessories:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.
b. CEMCO.
c. Clark Western Building Systems.
d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092400 092400 - 3
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
e. MarinoWARE.
f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.
2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating.
3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip
galvanized zinc coating.
4. External- Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating.
5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc - coated (galvanized) steel.
a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.
c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening
rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners.
d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at
locations indicated on Drawings.
6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc - coated (galvanized) steel; square -edged
style; with expanded flanges.
7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc - coated (galvanized) steel; one- piece -type,
folded pair of unperforated screeds in M- shaped configuration; with perforated flanges
and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc- coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of
unperforated screeds in M- shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
9. Two -Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc - coated (galvanized) steel;
formed to produce slip joint and square -edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8
inch wide; with perforated flanges.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
C. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not Tess than 0.0475 -inch
diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150.
1. Color for Finish Coats: White
B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092400 092400 - 4
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
1. Color for Job -Mixed Finish Coats: White
D. Ready -Mixed Finish -Coat Plaster: Mill -mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents,
and proprietary ingredients.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bonsai American, an Oldcastle Company; Marblesil Stucco Mix.
b. California Stucco Products Corp.; Conventional Portland Cement Stucco.
c. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco
Finish.
d. Florida Stucco; Florida Stucco.
e. LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Exterior Stucco Color Coat.
f. Omega Products International, Inc.; ColorTek Exterior Stucco.
g. QUIKCRETE; QUIKCRETE Finish Coat Stucco, No. 1201.
h. Shamrock Stucco LLC; Exterior Stucco.
i. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco.
j. USG Corporation; Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco.
2. Color: white. Stucco will be painted to match architects sample.
2.5 PLASTER MIXES
A. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three -coat plasterwork
as follows:
1. Portland Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4
parts lime. Use 2 -1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4
parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not
less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
B. Factory- Prepared Finish -Coat Mixes: For ready -mixed finish -coat plasters, comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames,
cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092400 092400 - 5
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
3.2 PREPARATION
•
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects
caused by plastering.
B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability
required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Expanded -Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond -mesh lath.
2. Flat - Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond -mesh Lath.
3. Curved - Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond -mesh lath.
4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self - furring, diamond -mesh lath.
3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:
1. Install lath -type, external - corner reinforcement at exterior locations.
2. Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.
C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
I . As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft.
b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft.
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c.
3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length -to -width ratios of not
greater than 2-1/2:1.
4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular- shaped areas
(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the comer formed by the dimension
change.
3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 -foot straightedge placed on surface.
2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built -in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092400 092400 - 6
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove
finish coat at junctures with metal.
3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field - applied finishes indicated.
3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking,
dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door
frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and
other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION 092400
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092900 092900 - 1
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.
2. Section 092216. "Non- Structural Metal Framing" for non - structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 092900 092900 - 2
GYPSUM BOARD
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire- resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Georgia - Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. PABCO Gypsum.
7. Temple- Inland.
8. USG Corporation.
• B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered
C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered
D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered. •
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092900 092900 - 3
GYPSUM BOARD
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum - coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U -Bead: J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
•
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting -type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying -type, ail- purpose compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high -build interior coating product
designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce
Level 5 finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092900 092900 - 4
GYPSUM BOARD
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back - blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor /roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8 -inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non- load - bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide- dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound- flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092900 092900 - 5
GYPSUM BOARD
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Single -Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall /partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly.
3. On Z- furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
■
1. Level 5: all locations, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application
patterns.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 092900 092900 - 6
GYPSUM BOARD
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture
finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite
these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and
overspray to prevent damage according to texture -finish manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non - drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 096513 096513 - 1
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard -size
Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern
required.
D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not Less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time
periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 096513 096513 - 2
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Flexco, Inc.
c. Johnsonite.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic)
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous)
3. Style: Cove (base with toe)
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches long.
F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 096513 096513 - 3
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H. rob- Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 096513 096513 - 4
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099113 099113 - 1
EXTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
L2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Wood.
2. Exterior portland cement plaster (stucco).
3. Pipe and Tube Railings
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on interior substrates.
2. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the
application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates.
3. Section 099653 "Elastomeric Coatings" for surface preparation and the application of
elastomeric paint on exterior stucco.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to'ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. .Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099113 099113 - 2
EXTERIOR PAINTING
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross - reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified,
with . the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well - ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099113 099113 - 3
EXTERIOR PAINTING
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Miller Paint.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
2.3 PRIMERS /SEALERS
A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.
B. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.
C. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.
D. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in
paint system indicated.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099113 099113 - 4
EXTERIOR PAINTING
2.4 WATER -BASED PAINTS
A. Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #10.
B. Latex, Exterior Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.
C. Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6: MPI #119.
D. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #161.
E. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #163.
F. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #164.
2.5 SOLVENT -BASED PAINTS
A. Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #8.
B. Alkyd, Exterior, Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.
C. Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #9.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099113 099113 - 5
EXTERIOR PAINTING
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Wood: 15 percent.
3. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface - applied protection.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended
in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099113 099113 - 6
EXTERIOR PAINTING
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
• 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 099113
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099123 099123 - 1
INTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
•
1. Gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 099123 099123 - 2
INTERIOR PAINTING
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross - reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well - ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
•
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following
1. Miller Paint.
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099123 099123 - 3
INTERIOR PAINTING
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in other Part 2
articles for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc -Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D. Low- Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental
Chambers."
E. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
2.3 FLOOR COATINGS •
A. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI #99.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099123 099123 - 4
INTERIOR PAINTING
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials
from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two
paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Spray- Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface - applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099123 099123 - 5
INTERIOR PAINTING
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099123 099123 - 6
INTERIOR PAINTING
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 099123
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099300 099300 - 1
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
• A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following
substrates:
1. Exterior Substrates:
a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for standard paint systems on exterior substrates.
2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for stains and transparent finishes on concrete floors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
•
D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches long.
2. Label each Sample for location and application area.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099300 099300 - 2
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross - reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND I- IANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well- ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures
are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Miller Paint. NW Weatherguard oil based semitransparent stain.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099300 099300 - 3
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
I . Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
2. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g /L.
3. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
D. Low- Emitting Materials: Interior stains and finishes shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental
Chambers."
2.3 WOOD FILLERS
A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.
2.4 PRIMERS AND SEALERS
A. Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood: MPI #6.
B. Primer, Alkyd for Exterior Wood: MPI #5.
C. Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood: MPI #7.
D. Preservative, for Exterior Wood: MPI #37.
E. Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear: MPI #102.
F. Shellac: MPI #88.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
I. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are
taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099300 099300 - 4
- STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished
with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two
finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are
aesthetically unacceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an
electronic moisture meter.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface - applied
protection before surface preparation and finishing.
1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface - applied protection if any.
C. . Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for
each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly
with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding
lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.
2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal
and as recommended by stain manufacturer.
D. Exterior Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099300 099300 - 5
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
a. For solid hide stained wood, stain edges and ends after priming.
b. For varnish coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish.
Prime undersides and backsides with varnish.
3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final
color. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated.
2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces.
3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks,
runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced finished wood surfaces.
END OF SECTION 099300
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099653 099653 - 1
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
SECTION 099653 - ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings to the following
exterior substrates:
1. Stucco.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
:1B A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of elastomeric coating indicated and in each color and
gloss.
1. Submit Samples on same type of substrate as that to receive application, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each separate coat, including primers and block fillers as
applicable.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, including the following:
1. Cross - reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Manufacturer's recommended spreading rate for each separate coat, including primers
and block fillers for each type of substrate as applicable.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and
that are packaged for storage in unopened, factory- sealed containers and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent but not Less than 1 gal. of each material, color,
and texture applied.
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099653 099653 - 2
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards: Comply with MPI standards indicated and provide elastomeric coatings listed
in the "MPI Approved Products List."
1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in the "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Prepare two mockups of each coating system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well - ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 90 deg F unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before
starting or continuing coating operation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric coatings that fail within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Water penetration through the coating.
b. Deterioration of coating beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099653 099653 - 3
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
•
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide elastomeric finish coatings and crack fillers, primers, and block fillers as
applicable for use within elastomeric finish coatings that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each material or coat, provide products and spreading rates recommended in writing
by elastomeric coating manufacturer for use on substrate indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC FINISH COATINGS
A. Coordinate exterior finishes with elastomeric finish coatings.
B. Exterior Non -Flat Waterborne, Pigmented Elastomeric Coating: MPI #38
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Thoro Thorolastic.
b. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Moorlastic.
c. Euclid Tamms; Tamms Tammolastic.
d. Flex Bon Paints; Ext. 100 %Acrylic Elastomeric Waterproof.
e. Frazee Paint & Wallcovering; EMC Elasto -Wall, Smooth Elastomeric Finish.
f. Kryton Canada Corporation; Kryton Wall Gard.
g. Modco Technology Ltd.; General Paint, Elastocoat.
h. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc., a subsidiary of PPI; Ext. Acrylic Elastomeric.
i. L & L Coatings Corporation; 300 Mastic (Brush, Roller, and Airless Spray Grade).
2. Surface Profile: Medium texture
3. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less
C. Exterior Flat Waterborne, Pigmented Elastomeric Coating: MPI #113.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cloverdale Paint;
b. Columbia Paint & Coatings; Hi Performance
c. Coronado Paint Company; Elast -O -Meric Acrylic Membrane - 20 mil.
d. Diamond Vogel Paints; Permaflex Elastomeric Latex Coating.
e. ICI Paints; Decra -Flex Elastomeric Coating.
f. Kelly -Moore Paints; Kel -Seal Terpolymer 100% Acrylic Elastomeric.
g. Kwal Paint; Kwal Accu -Pro Elasto Wall.
h. Miller Paint Co.; Milastic Elastomeric Coating.
i. Mills Paint; Weather Flex Elastomeric Coating.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099653 099653 - 4
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
j. Modco Technology Ltd.; Elastocoat Acrylic Elastomeric Paint.
k. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc., a subsidiary of PPI; EMC Elastomeric Coating.
1. PPG Industries; Pitt -Flex Elastomeric Coating.
m. Pratt & Lambert; Pro -Hide Gold Ext. Elastomeric Coating.
n. Rodda Paint Co.; Super Roflex Acrylic Elastomeric Coating.
o. Sherwin - Williams Company (The); Sherlastic Elastomeric Coating.
P. Spectra -Tone Paint Corporation; Elasto -Coat High Build Waterproofing Coating.
q. Teifs; Professional Coatings, TeifsLastic.
r. Vista Paint; Solotex.
s. BASF Building Systems; Sonneborn Colorflex.
t. Fox Industries, Inc.; FX -501 Elastomeric Coating.
u. L & L Coatings Corporation; 300 Mastic (Brush, Roller, and Airless Spray Grade).
v. M.A.B. Paints;
w. Neogard, a division of Jones -Blair Company; Neoflex.
x. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Sto Corp.; Stolastic.
y. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Enviro -Crete Series.
2. Surface Profile: Medium texture.
3. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Crack Fillers: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory- formulated crack
fillers or sealants, including crack filler primers, compatible with substrate and other materials
indicated; VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Primer: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory- formulated, alkali- resistant
primer compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.
C. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended,
factory- formulated, high- performance latex block filler compatible with substrate and other
materials indicated.
1. VOC Content: 200 g/L or Tess
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with manufacturer's
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Begin coating only when moisture content of substrate is 12 percent or Tess when measured with
an electronic moisture meter.
C. Begin coating no sooner than 28 days after substrate is constructed and is visually dry on both
sides.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099653 099653 - 5
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
D. Verify that substrate is within the range of alkalinity recommended by manufacturer.
E. Verify suitability of substrates including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
F. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in the "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems
indicated.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of item, provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation
and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface - applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of
surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce coating systems indicated.
2. Perform cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
D. Crack Repair: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating
surfaces.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
2. Coat surfaces behind movable items the same as similar exposed surfaces.
3. Apply each coat separately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Primers: Apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage.
C. Block Fillers: Apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.
D. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats similar to color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099653 099653 - 6
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
E. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform finish, color, and appearance.
F. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines
and color breaks.
•
G. Apply coatings to prepared surfaces as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface soiling or deterioration.
H. Spray Application: Use spray equipment for application only when permitted by authorities
having jurisdiction. Wherever spray application is used, do not double back with spray
equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following testing procedures:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample materials being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of materials with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop coating application if test results show materials
being used do not comply with requirements. Remove noncomplying materials from
Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces that were coated with rejected materials.
Remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with
complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
B. Field Testing and Inspection: Owner reserves the right to engage the services of a qualified
testing agency to verify installed thickness of elastomeric coatings.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated
surfaces.
3.6 COATING SCHEDULE
A. Stucco Substrates:
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 099653 099653 - 7
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
1. Primer: Stucco primer if required by manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Finish Coat(s): Manufacturer's recommended number of coats and total dry
film thickness for condition of substrate.
3. Finish -Coat Color: As indicated in a color schedule
•
END OF SECTION 099653
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Ten
SECTION 101300 101300 - 1
DIRECTORIES
SECTION 101300 - DIRECTORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Illuminated, changeable -letter directories.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Directories shall withstand the effects of gravity Toads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to
ASCE /SEI 7.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for directories.
B. Shop Drawings: For directories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1. Include sections of typical trim members.
2.. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory- applied color finishes, as follows:
1. Fabric swatches for letterboards.
2. Section of header panel for color selection.
D. Other Action Submittal:
1. Message -Strip Schedule: Layout of each directory and each message strip showing letter
size, font, spacing, indents, text copy, and graphics.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 101300 101300 - 2
DIRECTORIES
E. Delegated- Design Submittal: For directories indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For illuminated directories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Message Strips: Full -size, blank strips equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each
size indicated, but no fewer than 20 strips.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain directories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Surface - Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type
of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
B. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, and 6 mm thick unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other fastening devices made from same material as items
being fastened, except provide hot -dip galvanized, stainless- steel, or aluminum fasteners for
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 101300 101300 - 3
DIRECTORIES
exterior applications. Provide types, sizes, and lengths to suit installation conditions. Use
security fasteners where exposed to view.
2.2 MESSAGE -STRIP DIRECTORIES
A. Rear - Illuminated, Message -Strip Directory: Factory- fabricated weather - resistant unit consisting
of changeable message strips held in place by retainer frame enclosed in manufacturer's
standard 4 -to -6 -inch deep perimeter frame; with glazed cover, aluminum -sheet rear cover panel,
and concealed illumination system.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. APCO Graphics, Inc.
b. ASI- Modulex, Inc.
c. Nelson- Harkins Industries.
d. Poblocki Sign Company.
e. Tablet & Ticket Co. (The).
f. Vomar Products, Inc.
2. Reveal Frame and Nonsectional Cover: Glazing held in cover frame mounted on full -
length, concealed continuous hinge to form reveal between outer edge of cover frame and
inner edge of perimeter frame. Provide nonsectional, one -piece cover for access to
message strips, equipped with concealed lock.
a. Perimeter Frame: Extruded aluminum
b. Perimeter Frame Profile: Square
c. Perimeter Frame Corners: Square
d. Cover Frame: Same material and finish as perimeter frame.
1) Hinge Location: Side
e. Glazing: Clear float glass
f. Divider Color: Same as message strips.
3. Aluminum Finish
a. Match exterior window finish
4. Film- Insert Message Strips: Removable, black, negative -film message strips in 7 -inch-
long, interchangeable, interlocking plastic carriers.
5. Engraved Changeable Message Strips: Machine- or laser- engraved copy in 7 -inch long,
interchangeable, interlocking, black, acrylic strips with transparent core.
6. Width: 3' -6 ".
7. Height: 6' -0 ".
8. Mounting: Free standing
9. Mounting Height: 18" from grade.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 101300 101300 - 4
DIRECTORIES
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate directories to requirements indicated for dimensions, design, and thickness and finish
of materials. Use metals and shapes of thickness and reinforcement to produce flat surfaces,
free of oil canning, and to impart strength for -size, design, and application indicated.
B. Fabricate directory cabinets and door frames with reinforced corners, mitered and welded to a
hairline fit, with no exposed fasteners. Provide structural reinforcement to prevent racking and
misalignment.
C. Fabricate exterior directories with vents to permit evaporation of moisture trapped inside.
D. Message -Strip Directories: Provide blank message strips for each carrier in entire directory.
E. Message -Strip Directories: Provide message strips with wording and other designations for the
locations where wording is indicated. Include blank message strips as needed to fill out
remainder of directory.
F. Provide hold -open arms for doors of top- hinged directories.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
1. Color: Match window frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in for electrical power system to verify actual locations of connections
before installation of illuminated directories.
B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for directories.
C. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth if recessed directories will be installed.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 101300 101300 - 5
•
DIRECTORIES
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install directories in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if
not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb.
Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories
necessary for complete installation.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust directory doors to operate smoothly without warp or bind and so that contact points meet
accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 101300
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 101419 101419 - 1
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
•
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast dimensional characters.
2. Fabricated channel dimensional characters.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by
other installers.
11
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
01 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
11 others, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half
size.
11
di 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
�1 A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
�e 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
d1 A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction
by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
ii
®� RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
i , JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 101419 101419 - 2
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Cast Characters: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and
profiles, and as follows:
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a. Gemini Incorporated.
2. Character Material: Cast aluminum
3. Character Height: 8"
4. Thickness: 3 /4"
5. Finishes:
a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Dark Bronze anodized. T
6. Mounting: Concealed studs
7. Typeface: Roman
8. Fastening Type: Concealed with 1/4" standoff
2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign
manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from
view after final assembly.
2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist
water penetration and retention.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
�1
)
SECTION 101419 101419 - 3
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
)
) 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds
and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean
) exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
) 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.
4D 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to
) existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where
possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
) 7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and
) other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff
) castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before
finishing.
11)
) 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
)
) A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
ID B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
ID
) C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long
dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.
01
) D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication
but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.
)
I , 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
I1 A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class 1, 0.018 mm or thicker.
ID PART 3 - EXECUTION
ID
3.1 EXAMINATION
11 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
ID requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage
11 work.
ID B. Verify that sign - support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or
ID irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
I, C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
ID
11 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
0
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
ID JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
ID
SECTION 101419 101419 - 4
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign
surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that
would impair installation.
3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of
sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,
embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive
fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install
washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of
sign: Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until
spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with
spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud
ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template.
Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install
through fasteners and tighten. •
4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar
or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.
5. Adhesive: Clean bond - breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of
suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive
away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility
of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
6. Two -Face Tape: Clean bond - breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to
support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent
visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
)
SECTION 101419 101419 - 5
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
)
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
) A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with
) specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or
components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
®1
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
1111 C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's
) written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean
condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.
)
END OF SECTION 101419
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
a,
a0
111
®0
)
111
$11
111
0
)
)
40
0 RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
41,
11
11
SECTION 1 04416 104416 - 1
) FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
)
) SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
)
PART 1 - GENERAL
)
11 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
) A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
) Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
)
1.2 SUMMARY
) A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
)
) 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
111 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material
11 descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire
11 extinguisher and mounting brackets.
11
) 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
111 A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
11 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
)
111 A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
)
111 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
) A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
) Fire Extinguishers."
0 B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
(1 testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
) 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
1
11 1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
)
0 RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 104416 104416 - 2
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND- CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket idicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
c. Potter Roemer LLC.
2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard
3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard
4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B.
B. Multipurpose Dry- Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL -rated 2- A:10 -B:C, nominal capacity,
with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel container.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or black baked - enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
c. Potter Roemer LLC.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
1/
)
SECTION 104416 104416 - 3
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
)
) PART 3 - EXECUTION
)
) 3.1 EXAMINATION
_.� A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
)
) B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
)
) 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in
) compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
)
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
)
END OF SECTION 104416
)
)
)
1/
)
)
911 RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
411 JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
11
SECTION 105500
105500 - 1
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
)
) SECTION 105500 - POSTAL SPECIALTIES
)
) PART 1 - GENERAL
)
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
) A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
)
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
)
1.2 SUMMARY
) A. Section Includes:
1. USPS- approved cluster box units (CBUs).
111
) 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
11 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
) postal specialty.
) B. Shop Drawings: For postal specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
) attachments to other work.
) 1. Include identification sequence for compartments.
11 2. Include layout of identification text. '
3. Include setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and
other anchorages installed as part of the work of other Sections.
)
„ C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory- applied color finishes.
1) D. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS
regulations, signed by product manufacturer. Retain paragraph below for postal specialties
served by USPS.
) E. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal
specialties to be served by USPS.
) 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
11
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
„ A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
)
111 RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 105500 105500 - 2
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of
each corresponding lock and key number.
B. Deliver combination -lock combinations to Owner by registered mail or overnight package
service with a record of each corresponding lock and combination.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain templates for installing postal specialties and distribute to parties involved.
•
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of hardware
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use and finish indicated, and
as follows:
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
B. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled, ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, exposed
matte finish where exposed.
C. Metallic - Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating
designation, extra smooth where exposed; or electrolytic zinc - coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 879/A 879M, Coating Designation 08Z.
D. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
E. Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, manufacturer's standard copper alloy.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
11
)
SECTION 105500 105500 - 3
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
)
F. Zinc Sheet or Plate: ASTM B 69, manufacturer's standard sheet or plate and zinc alloy.
) G. Die -Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 85, manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy.
)
) H. Die -Cast Brass: ASTM B 176, manufacturer's standard copper alloy.
) I. Die -Cast Zinc: ASTM B 86, manufacturer's standard zinc alloy.
) J. Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or 55, hot -dip galvanized.
) K. Stainless -Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8M,
Type 316.
)
) L. Bituminous Coating: Cold - applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
)
2.2 USPS- APPROVED CLUSTER BOX UNITS (CBUs)
) A. General: Consisting of multiple compartments enclosed within freestanding, pedestal- mounted
) enclosure. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by
) unlocking master lock and swinging pair of side - hinged master doors to provide accessibility to
entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by
swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS- B- 1118F.
) 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Jayco, CB-
, 12 or comparable product by one of the following:
) B. Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view with powder - coated finish in color
) as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
1/
) 2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
) A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
) B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
) temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
) Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
)
) PART 3 - EXECUTION
)
) 3.1 INSTALLATION
„ A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
fb instructions and roughing -in drawings.
)
) RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 105500 105500 - 4
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
1. Where dissimilar metals will be in permanent contact with each other, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.
3. Final acceptance of postal specialties served by USPS depends on compliance with USPS
requirements.
B. Pedestal- Mounted Postal Specialties: Anchor units with 1/2 -inch- diameter, galvanized steel
anchor bolts with hooked ends.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test postal specialties served by USPS after they
have been installed according to USPS regulations.
B. Obtain written final approval of postal specialties to be served by USPS. Obtain this approval
from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust doors, hardware, and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended
by manufacturer. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
C. Touch up marred finishes or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory - finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty
manufacturer.
D. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair
by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 105500
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
ID
)
SECTION 107313 107313 - 1
AWNINGS
)
) SECTION 107313 - AWNINGS
)
PART 1 - GENERAL
)
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
)
) A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
)
) 1.2 SUMMARY
) A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed awnings.
)
11 B. Related Requirements:
i 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for blocking, shims, reinforcing, and supplemental
11 support members for connecting to awning frame and anchorage.
) 2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking, nailers, shims, reinforcing, framing, and
furring for connecting to awning frame and anchorage.
)
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
) 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, fabrication details, dimensions
11 of individual components and profiles, hardware, fittings, mounting accessories, features,
) and finishes for awnings.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
) specialties and accessories.
,r B. Shop Drawings:
ID
) 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, mounting heights, and attachment details.
„ 2. Detail fabrication and assembly.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
4, 4. Show locations for blocking, reinforcement, and supplementary structural support.
„ C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
)
) D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.
E. Product Schedule: For awnings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
)
F. Delegated - Design Submittal: For awnings.
4,
411 RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
„ JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
SECTION 107313 107313 - 2
AWNINGS
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For awnings to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
a. Methods for maintaining awning fabrics and finishes.
b. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
fabrics, finishes, and performance.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom - fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance.
1. Fabricator is a Master Fabric Craftsman certified by the Industrial Fabrics Association
International.
2. Fabricator's responsibilities include fabricating awnings and providing professional
engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. •
•
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS Dl .2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit installation of awnings in exterior locations to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Where awning installation is indicated to fit to other work, verify
dimensions of other work by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for fenestration operation throughout the entire operating
range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator agree to repair or replace components of
awnings that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
11
ID SECTION 107313
) 107313 - 3
AWNINGS
)
a. Structural failures including framework.
b. Faulty operation of operator.
) c. Deterioration of fabric including seam failure.
) d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
)
weathering.
2. Awning Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Fabric Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Thread Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
)
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
) A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pike Awning. or
comparable product by one of the following:
)
) 1. Pike Awning.
) B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
) "Quality Requirements," to design awnings.
)
) PART3- EXECUTION
)
) 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for supporting members, blocking, inserts, installation tolerances, and other
) conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
)
3.2 INSTALLATION
)
) A. General: Install awnings at locations and in position indicated, securely connected to supports,
free of rack, and in proper relation to adjacent construction. Use mounting methods of types
described and in compliance with Shop Drawings and fabricator's written instructions.
1/
B. Install awnings after other finishing operations, including joint sealing and painting, have been
completed.
)
C. Attach fabric to frames as recommended by fabricator, to ensure tight, wrinkle -free fit of fabric
to frame.
D. Slip fit frame connections accurately together to form hairline joints, and tighten to secure.
4,
4/
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
SECTION 107313 107313 - 4
AWNINGS
E. Weld frame connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations.
1. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
F. Anchoring to In -Place Construction: Use anchors, fasteners, fittings, hardware, and installation
accessories where necessary for securing awnings to structural support and for properly
transferring load to in -place construction.
G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
H. Coordinate awning installation with flashing and joint - sealant installation so these materials are
installed in sequence and in a manner that prevents exterior moisture from passing through
completed exterior wall and roof assemblies.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
retractable - awning manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, connections, and abraded
areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same or compatible material as used for shop -
applied finish painting.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 107313
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
41
)
)
)
�1 Division Twenty Six
)
)
!1
)
)
)
i1
41
)
41
)
)
)
41
)
)
41
41
11
)
)
01
)
�1
!1
41
a1
41
41
)
)
SECTION 26 00 00 26 00 00 - 1
) GENERAL PROVISIONS
0 SECTION 26 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS
)
) PART 1 - GENERAL
) 1.1 DESCRIPTION
41 A. The General and Supplemental Conditions apply to this Division, including but not
it limited to:
1. Drawings and Specifications.
2. Public ordinances, permits. Including but not limited to electrical and fire alarm
) permits.
, 3. Payments and fees required by governing authorities for work included in this
Division.
) 4. Change orders.
B. Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Division, including but not limited to:
) 1. Summary of Work, Section 01010.
2. Coordination, Section 01040.
41 3. Cutting and Patching, Section 01045.
) 4. Alternates, Section 01100.
5. Submittals, including Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, Section 01300.
6. Construction facilities and Temporary Controls, Section 01500.
) 7. Materials and Equipment, Section 01600: Substitution and Product Options.
) 8. Contract Closeout, Section 01700:
a Project Record Documents.
) b Operating and Maintenance Data.
) c Systems Demonstrations.
) 1.2 MECHANICAL WIRING
)
, A. The following schedule is intended to summarize the division of work and
responsibilities between Division 23 (formerly Division 15) and Division 26 (formerly
41 Division 16.)
FURNISHED POWER
) ITEM BY INSTALL WIRING CONTROL
�r BY WIRING
�r 1. Division 23 Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 23
) Equipment
Motors
it 2. Motor Starters, Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 23
Contactors and
„
Overload Heaters
O - Integral
it
411 RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
411 JOB NUMBER AD05183.01 •
SECTION 26 00 00 26 00 00 - 2
GENERAL PROVISIONS
FURNISHED POWER
ITEM BY INSTALL WIRING CONTROL
BY WIRING
3. Variable Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 23
Frequency Drives
(VFD's)
OD
4. Motor Control Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 23
Centers
5. Fused & Unfused Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26
Disconnect
Switches
6. Manual Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26
Operation
Switches
7. Control Relays & Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23
Transformers •
8. Energy Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23
Management
Control Panels
9. Motorized Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23
Solenoid Valves
10. Duct Mounted Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 23 — Equipment
smoke Detectors Shutdown
°Div. 26 — Fire Alarm
11. Fire /Smoke and Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 26
Smoke Dampers
1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for by
one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items shown on the Drawings are not
necessarily included in the Specifications. All directives and instructions to furnish,
provide, install, complete, test and methods described in these Specifications and
Drawings shall be interpreted as directives to the Electrical Contractor unless clearly
specified otherwise. It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying
drawings to describe complete and functional electrical systems. If errors or
discrepancies are discovered, notify the Architect immediately.
RED ROCK CENTER - .PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
11
SECTION 26 00 00 26 00 00 - 3
) GENERAL PROVISIONS
11
1.4 STI'E VISITATION
) A. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bidding to familiarize himself with existing
conditions and all other factors which may affect the execution of the work.
) 1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS
A. The completed installation shall conform to all applicable Federal, State and Local
) Codes, Ordinances and Regulations.
B. Obtain all necessary permits and inspections required by the governing authorities having
jurisdiction over this work.
C. Furnish to the Architect a certificate of approval from the inspection authority at the
) completion of the work, prior to the application for final payment.
)
1.6 SCOPE OF WORK
) A. The work covered by this Specification shall include furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment and services to construct and install the complete electrical system as shown
on the Drawings and specified herein. Verify all conditions on the job site and lay out
) work accordingly.
) B. The work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, the following systems:
) 1. Secondary service and distribution systems.
2. Complete lighting and power systems.
) 3. Grounding continuity.
) 4. Connection of electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions of work.
5. Telephone provisions.
6. Data provisions.
7. Television provisions.
C. The following equipment and work will be furnished under other Divisions of Work:
,1 1. Telephone, data and television wiring and equipment. (Note: coordinate with
above scope.)
11 2. Mechanical equipment motors and heaters, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
) 3. Equipment control wiring beyond the provisions shown on the Electrical
)
Drawings.
) 1.7 WARRANTY
411 A. Provide a written one -year warranty covering the work done under this Division as
required by the General Conditions. Incandescent lamps will be excluded from this
) warranty.
•1 B. Systems and Apparatus:
11 1. Free of defects of material and workmanship and in accord with the Contract
) Documents.
)
0/
I/ RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
SECTION 26 00 00 26 00 00 - 4
GENERAL PROVISIONS
2. Built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it
was designed.
3. Operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 1 requirements.
B. Submit all electrical data in 3 -point covered binders, indexed by section number,
covering all items of equipment and systems. Submit all electrical items at one time.
C. The installation and Record Drawings called for under submittals shall show all outlets,
devices, terminal cabinets, conduits, wiring and connections required for the complete
system described. Prints of these drawings shall be submitted prior to starting
installation. The Contractor submitted drawings, when approved, will then form the basis
for installation.
D. Submittals will not be permitted by fax.
E. Submittals will not be reviewed unless equipment is specifically indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The use of manufacturer's names, models and numbers in this Specification is intended to
establish style, quality, appearance and usefulness. Items noted "or equal" do not require
prior approval. Items noted "approved equivalent" or "approved substitute" require prior
approval.
B. Submit for the Architect's approval, manufacturer's detailed specifications and data sheets
for all proposed substitutions. Submittals shall consist of a single sheet, or sheets, if
required, for each piece of equipment and shall give the specific data needed for
consideration of approval. All pertinent data listed in the Specifications and in Schedules
shall be furnished, including all special features. See that all submittals are in proper
order, and that all equipment will fit in the space provided.
C. The Architect reserves the right to require the submission of an actual sample before the
acceptance of any product as an equal to that specified.
2.2 MATERIAL APPROVALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit all electrical data in 3 -point covered binders, indexed by Section number,
covering all items of equipment and systems. Include wiring diagrams where called for.
B. Review and recommendations by the Architect or Engineer are not to be construed as
change authorizations. If discrepancies between the shop drawings submitted and the
Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the data is processed, the
Contract Documents will govern. Shop drawing review will not occur without contract
cost data as outline below.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
)
) SECTION 26 00 00 26 00 00 - 5
GENERAL PROVISIONS
)
) PART 3 - EXECUTION
) 3.1 CONTRACT COST DATA
)
A. Furnish to the Architect a cost breakdown of the Electrical Contract.
)
) B. The cost breakdown shall include separate amounts for material and labor for each
) category listed below. Include costs data with the shop drawings submittal.
) 1. Secondary panels.
2. Switchgear and transformers
3. Feeders.
) 4. Disconnects, starters and equipment connections.
) 5. Branch circuit wiring and devices.
6. Data provisions.
7. Telephone provisions.
) 8. Television provisions.
) 9. Lighting control, luminaires and lamps.
) 3.2 CHANGE ORDERS
A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied with a complete
) itemized breakdown of labor and materials cost without exception. Contractor's
) estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be included. Labor must be
) separated and allocated for each item of work. Material cost, as used in this section, to be
Contractor's actual "invoice" cost. All discounts shall be detailed and shown on the
) invoice. Labor cost shall be the actual cost per manhour including all taxes and fees.
) The total estimated cost for any change will be considered a not -to- exceed price. The
supplemental cost approval will be based on this estimate but actual change order request
) for payment will be based on the contractors actual cost to perform this work and shall be
40 accompanied with a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials cost with
) backup invoices, without exception.
) 3.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
) A. The Contractor shall provide operating instructions and maintenance data, in 3 -point
covered binders, for all equipment and materials called for under this Division.
) B. Submit five copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at least four
) weeks before final review of the Project. Assemble all data in a completely indexed
volume or volumes and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item.
) C. Maintenance instruction manuals shall include complete cleaning and servicing data
) compiled in clearly and easily understandable form. Data shall show serial numbers of
each piece of equipment and complete lists of replacement parts.
)
)
)
)
) RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
) JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
SECTION260000 260000 -6
GENERAL PROVISIONS
3.4 ELECTRONIC INFORMATION
A. Electronic record information in AutoCAD format will be provided to the electrical
contractor upon request. A drawing release form will be sent to the contractor and upon
its return a compact disk will be made available to be picked up at System Design
Consultants, Inc office. One (1) copy of the base project construction document files will
be made available to the contractor at no charge, each additional request will be provided
at a cost of $150 per request.
B. All electrical sub contractors will make their request for the construction documents
through the electrical contractor.
3.5 RECORD INFORMATION
A. Maintain one set of construction documents marked up (red - lined) on a daily basis as the
work progresses, showing all changes, deviations, change orders, omissions, or other
variations from the contract drawings.
B. Record all conduits, stubups and equipment by dimensions from gridlines, below grade,
above floor, etc. Show location of all access panels, rough -in for future, etc.
C. Make record documents available to the Architect for review or printing during
construction.
D. On acceptance of the contractor record drawings by the Architect, the contractor will
transfer the record information in " AutoCAD" format to the electronic "AutoCAD"
drawing files. Refer to 26 00 00- 3.4(A) for obtaining documents and applicable charges.
E. Deliver record drawings files on floppy disk to the Architect promptly upon completion
of the project. Record information added to the " AutoCAD" drawing files is to have
compatible format, linework and lettering as the original files. All new work done by the
contractor on the original drawing files is to be on a single layer noted in the revised
drawing file as "RECORD ".
3.6 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Refer to Electrical Drawings for detailed information relating to the appropriate
alternates.
3.7 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Protect all electrical work and equipment installed under this Division against damage by
•
other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in
other than new condition will be rejected as defective.
B. Switchgear, transformers, panels, light fixtures and all electrical equipment shall be kept
covered or closed to exclude dust, dirt and splashes of plaster, cement or paint and shall
be free of all such contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new
condition, free of rust, scratches and other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner
acceptable to the Architect, if damaged.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
SECTION 26 00 00 26 00 00 - 7
) GENERAL PROVISIONS
)
• 3.8 MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE
A. Electrical service shall be maintained to all functioning portions of the building
) throughout construction, except as noted below, during all normal working hours of the
building occupants. Outages to occupied areas shall be kept to a minimum and be
prearranged with the Architect or Owner's Representative. This Contractor will be liable
) for any damages resulting from unscheduled outages or for those not confined to the pre-
) arranged times.
) B. Signal and communication systems and equipment shall be kept in operation wherever
) these serve occupied or functional portions of the building. Outages of these facilities
shall be treated the same as electrical power outages.
)
) C. Telephone services where required during the construction work will be maintained by
the telephone company. This work shall be coordinated with the telephone company in
such a manner that service, as required by the building occupants, can be readily installed
) and maintained.
) D. Include all costs for temporary facilities, overtime labor and necessary provisions to
) maintain electrical services in the initial bid proposal. Temporary wiring and facilities, if
used, shall be removed and the site left clean before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 26 00 00
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE U SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.0I
SECTION 26 05 00 26 05 00 - 1
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and Section 26 00 00 apply to this Section.
1.2 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Conduct work in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all
items of equipment. Consult the Drawings of all other trades or crafts to avoid conflicts
with cabinets, counters, equipment, structural members, etc. In general, the architectural
drawings govern but conflicts shall be resolved with the Architect prior to rough -in.
B. Verify the physical dimension of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available
space. Coordination of the equipment to fit into the available space and the access routes
through the construction shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
C. Coordinate rough -in and wiring requirements for all mechanical equipment with
mechanical contractor and equipment supplier. Make installation in accordance with
rough -in - and - wiringdiagrams provided by equipment supplier for Contractor's use:
Report immediately to architect any deviation between contract documents and actual
equipment requirements.
D. Coordinate all aspects of the electrical, telephone and other utility services with the
appropriate serving utility. No additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor
for connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or
Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utility.
E. Coordinate underground work with other contractors working on the site. Particular
coordination shall be performed with contractors installing storm sewer, sanitary sewer,
water and irrigation lines, to avoid conflicts. Common trenches may be used with other
trades, providing clearances required by codes and ordinances are maintained.
1.3 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
,, A. The Electrical Drawings accompanying these Specifications are design drawings and
generally are diagrammatic indicating approximate locations of outlets and wiring. They
ID do not show every offset, bend, junction box, etc., which may be required for installation
to complete the system. Minor deviations in methods, circuiting and branch circuit
distribution or arrangements to suit construction conditions are permissible.
B. The intent of the branch circuiting and control shown shall not be changed nor homeruns
combined without the approval of the Architect. Feeder runs shall not be combined or
changed.
11
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
ID JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 00 26 05 00 - 2
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
C. Cross or hash marks on conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 copper branch circuit
conductors, in addition to a Bounding conductor, unless otherwise noted. Where such
marks do not appear, provide minimum of two conductors with ground, minimum No.
12, size as required for loads and/or equipment being served. Contractor is responsible
to assure that the maximum voltage drop on any circuit does not exceed 5% at the
load. The contractor shall review panel schedule to verify wire /conduit size required.
D. Conduit sizes shown or listed on the drawings are for reference only. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to provide and install conduit sized per current NEC
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by a recognized testing
laboratory or approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by
governing codes and ordinances.
B. Materials shall be new, of the best quality. The materials shall be manufactured in
accordance with NEMA, ANSI, UL or other applicable standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a completely properly operating system for each item of equipment called for
under this work. Installations shall be in accord with the equipment manufacturer's
instructions, the best industry practices and the contract documents. Where a conflict in
these guides appear, the Architect shall be requested to provide proper clarification
before work is roughed in and his decision will be final. Work installed without such
clarification shall be removed and corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. Make installation in a neat, finished and safe manner, according to the latest published
NECA Standard of Installation under competent supervision.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical work in
compliance with Section 02220.
B. For direct burial cable or non - metallic conduit, a minimum 3 -inch cover of sand or clean
earth fill shall be placed all around the cable or conduit on a leveled trench bottom. Lay
all steel conduit on a smooth level trench bottom, so that contact is made for its entire
length. Water shall not be present in the trench when electrical conduit is being laid.
C. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 8- inches deep and compact to 95% of maximum
density at optimum moisture to preclude settlement.
1. Interior: Bank sand or pea gravel.
2. Exterior: Excavated material with final 8- inches clean soil.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 00 26 05 00 - 3
' BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Following backfilling, grade all trenches to the level of surrounding soil. All excess soil
shall be disposed of at the site as directed.
E. Provide 6 -inch wide vinyl tape marked "ELECTRICAL" in backfill, 12- inches below
finished grade, above all conduit runs.
F. Coordinate patching of all asphalt or concrete surfaces disturbed by this work with
• General Contractor.
3.3 NOISE CONTROL
A. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back -to -back nor straight
through boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by
note, to minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces.
B. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices shall not be placed
on walls which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the
Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls, common to occupied spaces,
they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the
transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space.
C. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be
noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective
and shall be replaced.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such
connections, including incidental wiring, materials, devices and labor necessary for a
finished working installation.
B. Verify the location and method for connecting to each item of equipment prior to
roughing -in. Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting.
C. Make motor connections for the proper direction of rotation. Minimum size flex for
mechanical equipment shall be 1/2 -inch except at small control devices where 3/8 -inch
may be used. Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex with 6- inches
minimum slack loop. Pump motors shall not be test run until liquid is in the system.
D. Control devices and wiring relating to the HVAC systems will be furnished installed
under Division 15 except for provisions or items specifically shown on the Electrical
Drawings or specified herein.
E. Furnish all code required disconnects under this work, whether specifically shown or not.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 00 26 05 00 - 4
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
A. Anchoring and bracing to the building structural elements in accord with all codes and
regulations regarding seismic design conditions. The contractor is responsible to
determine the means and methods of equipment installation and support. Seismic
restraints for electrical and communication equipment shall bear the seal and signature of
a structural engineer registered in the state of Oregon, and shall be submitted to the
Architect prior to fabrication. Calculations are to be included for all connections to the
structure, considering localized effects.
B. Each fastening device and support for electrical equipment, fixtures, panels, outlets and
cabinets shall be capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of the
object or objects fastened or suspended from the building structure.
C. Properly and adequately support fixtures installed under this work from the building
structure. Supports shall provide proper alignment and leveling of fixtures. Flexible
connections where permitted to exposed fixtures shall be neat and straight, without
excess slack, attached to the support device.
D. Support all junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located
above the suspended ceiling from the floor above, roof or penthouse floor structure to
prevent sagging or swaying.
E. Conduits:
1. Support suspended conduits 1 -inch and larger from the overhead structural
system with metal ring or trapeze hangers with threaded steel rod having a safety
factor of 4.
2. Conduit installed in poured concrete shall be anchored to the reinforcing steel
with No. 14 black iron wire.
3.6 ALIGNMENT
A. Install panels, cabinets and equipment level and plumb, parallel with structural building
lines. Switchgear panels and all electrical enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps,
openings or distortion. Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved
devices.
B. Fit surface panels, devices and outlets with neat, appropriate trims, plates or covers,
without overhanging edges, protruding corners or raw edges, to leave a finished
appearance.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Include cutting, patching and restoration of finishes necessary for this work. Surfaces
damaged by this work and spaces around conduits passing through floors and walls shall
be neatly patched and finished to match the adjacent construction, including painting or
other finishes. Clean up and remove all dirt and debris. This work shall all be performed
to the satisfaction of the Architect. Refer to Section 01045.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 00 26 05 00 - 5
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.8 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE -RATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core - drilled holes to
accommodate their through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve or core - drilled
hole and pipe passing through, shall be firestopped to meet the requirements of ASTM E-
814, in accordance with Section 07270 - Firestopping.
B. Provide properly sized expansion fittings for all conduits crossing over building
expansion joints.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 19 26 05 19 - 1
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
SECTION 26 05 19 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Deliver conductors to the job site in cartons, protective covers or on reels.
2. Conductors for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer except as noted.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
•
2.1 CONDUCTORS - 600 V
A. Type:
1. No. 12 AWG minimum size unless noted otherwise.
2. No. 8 and larger, stranded, Class B.
B. Stranding: Copper, concentric or compressed
C. Insulation: THEN, THWN, XHHW unless noted or specified otherwise.
D. Through wiring in fluorescent fixtures shall be rated for 90 degree C.
E. Manufacturers: G.E., Hatfield, Anaconda, Rome or equal.
2.2 CORD DROPS AND PORTABLE CORDS
A. Copper type "S" or "SO" heavy duty, rubber insulated unless otherwise noted.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Branch Circuit Conductor Splices: Live spring type, Scotch -Lok, Ideal Wing Nut or self -
stripping type, 3M Series 560.
B. Cable Splices: Compression tool applied sleeves, Kearney, Burndy or equal with 600V
heat shrink insulation.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II STYE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 19 26 05 19 - 2
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
C. Lugs: Conductors no. 6 and larger, except on molded case circuit breakers, two hole,
long barrel pressure tool set Thomas & Betts No. 54,000 series, Burndy "Hydent ",
Anderson Electric VCEL, or approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and
raceway entrances after the pull is made.
B. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding pulling tensions,
bending radii of the cable and compounds.
C. Conductors entering terminal or junction boxes mounted on hermetically sealed
refrigeration compressor motors shall be copper.
D. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be
pulled in until all bushings are installed and raceways terminations are completed. Wire
shall not be pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is poured
and forms are stripped.
E. Conductor sizes shown on the Drawings are for copper only.
3.2 CONNECTORS
A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool applied spade flared lug
when terminating at a screw connection.
B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight
hour period.
C. All tool - applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's
recommendations and physically checked for tightness.
3.3 COLOR CODING
A. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A -B -C left -to -right or A -B -C
top -to- bottom.
B. Switchlegs, travelers, etc. to be consistent with the phases to which connected or a color
distinctive from that listed.
C. Under 250 Volts Phase -to- Phase:
Phase A - Black Neutral - White
Phase B - Red Ground - Green
Phase C — Blue
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 19 26 05 19 - 3
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
D. Over 250 Volts Phase -to- Phase:
Phase A - Brown Neutral - White with tracer
Phase B - Orange Ground - Green
Phase C - Yellow
END OF SECTION 26 15 19
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 26 26 05 26 - 1
GROUNDING AND BONDING
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Provide complete building grounding system.
2. Provide ground bus bar at each telephone demarcation and data distribution
location.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions,
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods,
C. Section 26 05 19: Conductors and Connectors
D. Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices and Plates
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. Bare or green insulated copper.
2.2 GROUND ROD CONNECTORS
A. Cast, set screw or bolted type.
2.3 ELECTRODES
A. Copper clad steel minimum 314 -inch diameter by 8 feet long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding system will consist of the following:
1. Minimum of 20' bare no. 4 copper concrete - encase grounding conductor.
2. Provide bond to building steel.
3. provide bond to cold water piping within 5' of building entry.
4. Provide bond to minimum of 2 ground rods.
B. Establish a ground for each separately derived system, e.g., transformers and generators,
per NEC 250 -30.
C. All grounding conductors shall be sized in accord with the National Electrical Code.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 26 26 05 26 - 2
GROUNDING AND BONDING
D. Grounding conductor connectors shall be made up tight and located for future servicing
and to ensure low impedance.
E. Ground the electrical system, the cold water service, structural steel, and transformers to
the building ground grid.
F. All feeder and service raceways shall be grounded.
G. All plug -in receptacles shall be bonded to the boxes, raceways and grounding conductor.
H. Provide equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuit, feeder and service
raceways.
L Provide insulated grounding conductor in all branch circuit wiring serving Classrooms,
Administration offices and all data locations.
J. Provide bonding jumper between ground and neutral bus at main service.
3.2 GROUND BUS BAR (TELEPHONE DEMARCATION AND DATA DISTRIBUTION)
A. Provide & install copper ground bus bar on isolators, 6" x 2" minimum. Install 1 - #6
insulated conductor to the building grounding connection at the main distribution panel.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 33 260533 -1
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
SECTION 26 05 33 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Provide raceways and conduits of specified types for all electrical systems
wiring, except where clearly shown or specified otherwise. All fittings, boxes,
hangers and appurtenances shall be included.
2. Size raceways and conduits as indicated on the Drawings. Where no size is
indicated, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of
type THW conductors installed. Minimum size is 3/4 ".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 26 05 33.12 Metal -Clad Cable
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operational Instructions and Maintenance Data:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALLIC CONDUITS
A. GRC: Threaded rigid heavy wall galvanized steel.
B. IMC: Threaded intermediate galvanized steel.
C. EMT: Zinc coated steel electrical metallic tubing.
D. ARC: Threaded rigid heavy wall aluminum.
E. Flex: Flexible metal with and without polyvinyl chloride jacket.
F. Liquidtight flexible conduit: Zinc steel core with smooth gray abrasion - resistant, liquid -
tight PVC cover with integral ground wire wound in steel core.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 33 26 05 33 - 2
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
G. MC (Metal Clad) cable. Note: Metal Clad cable may be used for branch circuit wiring as
specified herein . Refer to Part 3 of this section for uses permitted.
1. MATERIALS
a Cable shall be steel jacketed interlocking armor with internal fully
insulated green grounding conductor. Cable shall contain multi -
conductor thermoplastic insulated type THHN color coded solid or
stranded copper conductors and shall be U.L. approved for the intended
application.
b Connections, terminations and fasteners shall be U.L. approved for the
application, and designed specifically for use with the cable used, and
shall have insulated throats to protect the wire.
2. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
a MC Cable: AFC /A Nortek Company, Type Mc -Lite, HC -90; Alflex,
Armorlite.
b Tools: Cable manufacturer approved type with controlled depth rotary
cutter.
2.2 NON - METALLIC CONDUITS
A. Rigid non - metallic conduit: Type II PVC schedule 40, suitable for use with 90 degrees C
rated wire. Conduit shall conform to UL Standard 651 and carry appropriate UL listing
-for above- and - below - ground -use.
2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Acceptable manufacturer(s): Wiremold, Panduit or as noted on drawings.
B. Type, size with quantity and spacing of outlets as shown on drawings. Provide with
snap -on cover, connectors, fittings and incidental items required for a complete
installation. Raceway shall be in continuous length as indicated on drawings.
2.4 WIREWAYS
A. Troughs: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knock -outs on standard
spacing, hinged cover.
B. Fittings: Tees, elbows, couplings as required for configuration shown on the Drawings.
C. Supports: U- shaped, 1/4 -inch by 1 -1/2 -inch steel strap, bent and prime painted.
2.5 FITTINGS
A. GRC, IMC AND ARC:
1. The conduit itself must be threaded, threaded couplings attached by any means
are not allowed.
2. Threaded locknuts.
3. Threaded bushings: 1 -1/4 inch and larger shall be of the insulated, grounding
type as required under Section 26 05 26.
4. Expansion fittings: O -Z /Gedney Electrical Mfg. Co. type E expansion coupling
with bonding jumper for up to four inches of movement.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
)
SECTION 26 05 33 26 05 33 - 3
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
B. EMT:
1. Connectors: Steel compression ring type for conduit termination, with insulated
throat, suitable for conditions used.
2. Couplings: Steel compression ring type, concrete tight.
C. Weatherproof Connectors: Threaded pipe connections with waterproofing compound.
2.6 METALLIC BOXES
A. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock -out
plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required, RACO or equal.
B. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings; cast
steel or aluminum with threaded hubs for use on walls.
C. Large Boxes: Boxes exceeding 4 -11/16 inches square when required shall be welded
steel construction with screw cover and painted, steel gauge as required by physical size,
Hoffman, Circle AW or equal.
D. Floor Boxes:
1. Fully- adjustable, Walker 880 series, Hubbell or approved substitute.
2. Equip all floor outlets with Lexan polycarbonate flanges, black finish, Walker
817, 827 or 837 series with cover plate, Hubbell or approved substitute. Verify
floor type.
E. Floor Boxes (Power and Data):
1. Fully- adjustable flush concrete box, Walker "Resource RFB" series, model
RFB4.
2. Equip all floor outlets with recessed carpet trim plate with mire management
blocks, Walker RAKMII. Verify floor type.
2.7 NON - METALLIC BOXES
A. PVC, molded enclosures, threaded hubs.
2.8 OTHERS
A. Any conduits, fittings, etc. specifically not mentioned above are not approved for use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conceal all conduits in finished spaces and elsewhere so far as practicable. Concealed
conduits shall run in a direct line with long sweep bends and offsets. GRC and [MC
embedded in concrete below grade or in damp locations shall be made water -tight by
painting the entire male thread with Rustoleum metal primer, or equal, before assembly.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
i
SECTION 26 05 33 26 05 33 - 4
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
B. Route exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to structural building lines, and neatly
offset into boxes. Conduits attached directly to building surfaces shall closely follow the
ID
surfaces. Conduit fittings shall be used to "saddle" under beams.
C. Conduits, whether exposed or concealed, shall be securely supported and fastened at
intervals of nominally every 8 feet and within 18 inches of each outlet, ell, fitting, panel,
etc.
D. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to
prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean
and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance.
E. Pack spaces around conduits with oakum and seal to prevent entrance of moisture where
conduits are installed in sleeves or block -outs penetrating moisture barriers.
F. Where conduits penetrate fire rated concrete walls or floors, provide non - combustible
caulking or putty 3M fire barrier material of thickness required to equal or exceed the
fire rating of wall or floor.
3.2 CONDUIT
A. Install GRC or IMC galvanized steel conduits for wiring underground, in -cast- concrete
construction, in damp locations, in hazardous areas and where subject to mechanical
injury, with threaded fittings made up tight.
B. EMT may be employed in all other dry protected locations.
C. ARC may be used wherever EMT is acceptable, with no restriction on size.
D. Flex is required where flexibility is necessary as at motors, transformers and recessed
lighting fixtures, etc. Flex shall be jacketed type, except where concealed in dry
locations and spaces such as ceiling cavities.
E. PVC may be used underground, under interior slabs or where scheduled or noted on the
Drawings. Make connections with waterproof solvent cement. Provide GRC at 60
degree and larger bends and where penetrating slabs or elling up above grade in exterior
locations. PVC conduit shall not be installed less than 30" under roadways or areas
subject to heavy traffic. Provide a ground wire sized per code in all PVC conduits.
Conductor quantities indicated in conduits do not include ground wires unless otherwise
noted.
F. Conduit stubbed from a concrete slab or wall to serve an outlet under a table or to supply
a machine shall have a rigid conduit coupling flush with the surface of the slab. Provide
plug where conduit is to be used in future.
G. Conduits in above -grade slabs shall be located in the middle of the slab. The maximum
size, spacing, and location of conduits in post- tensioned slabs shall be subject to approval
by the structural engineer Conduits larger than one inch shall not be run in slabs.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 33 0 26 05 33 - 5
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
H. MC (Metal Clad) cable uses permitted :
1. Metal Clad cable shall only be used for branch circuit interior wiring where
accessible for temporary lighting.
2. Metal Clad cable shall not be used for branch circuit home runs. Home runs shall
be installed using conduit and conductor method from the circuit breaker panel to
a junction box in the accessible ceiling above the room served by the branch
circuit or adjacent to the room if that room's ceiling space is inaccessible. From
the accessible area junction box, Metal Clad cable may be used to each device or
luminaires.
I. MC (Metal Clad) cable installation :
• 1. Support horizontal and vertical cable 6 feet on center (maximum) and within 6
inches of boxes with approved cable clamps.
2. Support cable above accessible ceilings; do not rest cables on ceiling tiles.
Attach cables with metal clips or plastic cable ties to support wires from structure
on 6 foot centers maximum.
3. Cable shall be cut with manufacturer approved devices.
4. Splice conductors only in accessible junction boxes.
5. Cable shall not be supported from, or come in contact with, mechanical ducts,
-water, sprinkler or gas - piping;- maintain-6 -inch- separation- minimum.
6. Provide junction box at all cable penetrations of wall, ceiling or floor surfaces for
equipment connections; cable shall not be run directly through finished surfaces.
7. Voltage drop: Conductors over 75 feet for 120 volt, and over 200 feet for 277
volt, for branch or individual circuit home runs from equipment connection,
receptacle or lighting fixture shall be No. 10 AWG minimum.
8. Provide junction box at transition from concealed to exposed wiring. Exposed
wiring shall conform to Section 26 05 33 - Conduits, Raceways, Boxes and
Fittings.
9. Where cable penetrates fire -rated walls or floors, provide mechanical fire stop
fitting with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating.
10. Provide junction box at transition from interior to exterior wiring. Exterior
wiring shall conform to Section 26 05 33 - Conduits, Raceways, Boxes and
Fittings.
3.3 RACEWAYS
A. Surface metal raceway with snap -in cover may be used in finished spaces only as
specified, or shown on Drawings.
B. Surface metal wireways may be installed at locations to serve motor starters or other
control devices where required by a multitude of wiring interconnections or physical
layout.
C. Expansion Joints:
1. All conduits crossing expansion joints where cast in concrete shall be provided
with expansion - deflection fittings, equivalent to OZ /Gedney AXDX, installed per
manufacturers recommendations.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
e
SECTION 26 05 33 26 05 33 - 6
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
2. All conduits three inches and larger where not cast in concrete shall be rigidly
secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint
with an expansion- deflection fitting across the joint, equivalent to OZ /Gedney
AXDX, installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. All conduits less than three inches where not cast in concrete shall be provided
with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of the expansion joint,
connected together with 15 inches of slack (a minimum of 15 inches longer than
the straight line length) flexible conduit with copper green ground bonding
jumper. In lieu of this flexible conduit, an expansion- deflection fitting, as
indicated for conduits three inch and larger, may be installed.
D. Seismic Joints
1. No conduits cast in concrete shall be allowed to cross a seismic joint. 0
2. All conduits shall be provided with junction boxes securely fastened on both
sides of the expansion joint, connected together with 15 inches of slack (a
minimum of 15 inches longer than the straight line length) flexible conduit with
copper green ground bonding jumper. Prior to installation, verify with Architect
that the 15 inches is adequate for the designed movement, and if not, increase this ■
length as required.
•
3.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. The raceway system shall provide a complete enclosure that protects the wires installed
therein against damage.
B. There shall not be any openings that exceed 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) in width on surfaces
that are accessible following installation of the system.
3.5 FITTINGS
A. Metallic raceways and conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes,
panels, etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electrical continuity. All conduit joints
shall be cut square, reamed smooth with all fittings drawn up tight.
3.6 BOXES
A. Outlet boxes shall be of code required size to accommodate all wires, fittings and
devices. Provide multi -gang boxes as required to accept devices installed with no more
than one device per gang. Equip all metallic boxes with grounding provisions.
B. Flush wall switch and receptacle outlets used with conduit systems shall be 4 inches
square, 1 -1/2 inches or more deep, with one or two -gang plaster ring mounted vertically.
Where three or more devices are at one location, use one piece multiple gang tile box or
gang box with suitable device ring.
C. Wall bracket and ceiling surface mounted lighting fixture outlets shall be 4 -inch octagon,
1 -1/2- inches deep with 3/8 -inch fixture stud where required. Wall bracket outlets to have
single gang opening where required to accommodate fixture canopy. Provide larger
boxes or extension rings where quantity of wires installed requires more cubic capacity.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 33 26 05 33 - 7
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
D. Boxes for the special systems shall be suitable for the equipment installed. Coordinate
size and type with the system supplier.
E. Provide pull boxes where shown, or in conduit runs greater than 100 feet, or where
required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90 degree
bends or equivalent. Use galvanized boxes of code required size with removable covers
installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed. Do not locate pull
boxes or junction boxes in finished areas unless specifically shown or special permission
is obtained from Architect.
F. Boxes shall be flush with finished surfaces or not more than 1/8 -inch below surface and
be level and plumb. Long screws with spacers or shims for mounting devices will not be
acceptable. No combustible material shall be exposed to wiring at outlets.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 53 26 05 53 - 1
IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served
or the function of each item of equipment connected under this work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LABELS
A. Panels: Typed or pre - printed white permanent materials labels with adhesive backing,
Specified Products, Inc. or equal.
B. Switchgear, Panelboards and Transformers: "Lamicoid ", 3 -ply laminated plastic, black
with white letters, Minimum 1/4" letters.
1. Provide label on MDP to read:
THIS INSTALLATION-DESIGNED BY
SYSTEM DESIGN CONSULTANTS,
INC.
PORTLAND, OR
503- 248 -0227
(year installed)
C. Equipment: Dymo -Tape, plastic tape with adhesive backing, field printed with proper
tool.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SWITCHGEAR
A. Label the main and feeder protective devices in all distribution panels with laminated
plastic_labels indicating the function or the load served.
B. Provide labels for all bussed spaces indicating size of future breaker or switch that may
be installed in the space reserved.
3.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Indicate panel number with laminated plastic labels. Indicate voltage phase and feeder
source, feeder wire size, and feeder breaker or fuse size with white permanent labels on
the inside of the panel door.
B. Provide machine - printed panel directories with protective, clear transparent covers,
accurately accounting for every breaker installed, including spares. Schedules shall use
the actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work
and not the space designation on the Construction Drawings.
RED ROCK CEN'1P;R - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 05 53 26 05 53 - 2
IDENTIFICATION
3.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Label all disconnect switches, motor starters, relays, contactors, time switches indicating
voltage, amperage, circuit number and equipment served with white permanent labels.
B. Label all transformers and busways with black and yellow 4 -1/2 inch high pre - printed
adhesive backed materials.
3.4 SYSTEMS
A. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors with each conductor
identified throughout, using wraparound numbers or letters. Use the number or letters
shown where the Drawings or operation and maintenance data indicate wiring
identification.
B. Label the fire alarm and communication equipment zones, controls, indicators, etc. with
machine printed labels or indicators appropriate for the equipment installed, as supplied
or recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
•
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 26 20 00 26 20 00 - 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 26 20 00 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Furnish and install the materials for the secondary service and distribution system
as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
2. Provide switches of proper characteristics as disconnecting means.
1.2 METERING
A. Provide metering facilities as indicated on the Drawings, complying with the established
serving utility requirements.
B. Include all metering charges or connection costs charged by the serving utility in the
original proposal. Refer to section 26 05 00 -1.2, Coordination of Work, of these
Specifications.
13 RELATED .WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 26 28 00: Circuit Protective Devices
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, include dimensional layout of equipment.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation Instruction and Maintenance Data.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. ITE- Siemens, Square D or approved substitute.
2.2 MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
A. The main distribution panel shall be metal clad units containing circuit protection devices
as shown on the drawings. Panel shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and shall
bear a U. L. Label as suitable for use as service equipment.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
•
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 20 00 26 20 00 - 2
GENERAL PROVISIONS
B. The bus work shall be copper or aluminum, sized as required by code but in no case
smaller than that shown on the Drawings, with a maximum hot -spot temperature rise of
65 degrees C. above an ambient of 40 degrees C. under continuous full load current and
braced for the available fault current but in no case less than 100,000 A.I.C. Provide
ground bus in bottom of enclosure, full length of assembly.
C. Ensure all equipment bussing, bracing and devices have short- circuit rating exceeding
that of available fault current.
D. Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick- break, horsepower rated and certified for
100,000 A.I.C.
•
E. No main circuit breakers shall be permitted, unless specifically indicated on drawings.
F. Where main circuit breakers are used, they shall be rated for the available fault current
and in no case less than 22,000 A.I.C. minimum. Contractor shall be responsible for
coordinating available fault current with serving utility.
G. Assemblies shall be primed and finished with not less than two coats of light gray
enamel.
H. Care shall be taken when selecting coordinated equipment to supply branch panels with
proper A.1.C. breaker ratings.
2.3 SUB - DISTRIBUTION PANELS
A. Sub - distribution panels shall be free standing, front operated fused switch type, fully
enclosed with bussing provisions for future extension. Fuse sizes shall be as noted on the
Drawings.
B. The bus work shall be sized as shown on the Drawings, with a maximum hot -spot
temperature rise of 65 degrees C. above an ambient of 40 degrees C. under continuous
full Load current and braced for the available fault current but in no case less than 100,000
A.I.C. Provide ground bus in bottom of enclosure.
C. Assemblies shall be primed and finished with not less than two coats of light gray
enamel.
D. Arrange loads from the panel to balance the load currents as equally as possible between
the phases.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the distribution assemblies as shown on the Drawings, parallel and square with the
building lines.
B. Neatly lace and secure the conductors of the feeder circuits individually at maximum 2
foot intervals. The cable lugs shall not support the weight of the cables.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE 11 SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 20 00 26 20 00 - 3
GENERAL PROVISIONS
3.2 CONCRETE PADS
A. Provide 4 -inch deep concrete pads under all free standing pieces of switchgear.
END OF SECTION 26 20 00
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION262400 262400 -1
SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Provide branch panels as shown.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 26 20 00: Electrical Distribution System
D. Section 26 28 00: Circuit Protective Devices
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation Instruction and Maintenance Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRANCH PANELBOARDS
A. Branch circuit panels shall be bolt -in circuit breaker type with aluminum or copper
bussing. Panels shall be fitted with flush lift latches and locks keyed alike. Deliver all
panel keys to the Owner at completion of the project.
•
B. Panelboard bussing and breakers shall be rated to withstand available fault current.
C. Provide full size ground bus in all panelboards.
D. Lugs: Conductors no. 6 and larger, except on molded case circuit breakers, two hole,
long barrel pressure tool set Thomas & Betts No. 54,000 series, Burndy "Hydent ",
Anderson Electric VCEL, or approved.
E. Wiring gutters shall be a minimum of 4 inches wide except where feeder conductors enter
where a minimum of 6 inches clear shall be provided. Feeder conductors to enter directly
in line with lug terminals wherever practicable. Provide separate feeder lugs and studs
for each feeder conductor.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 24 00 26 24 00 - 2
SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS
F. Branch circuit breakers shall be identified with individual circuit numbers adjacent to
each breaker with a typewritten card to identify the load controlled by that breaker.
Circuit breakers shall be nominally one inch on centers to allow for easy operation of the
handles. Arrange breakers in the panels as scheduled on the Drawings. Where no
schedule is listed, arrange with the one -pole breakers at the top of the panel, followed by
the two -pole and three -pole breakers with blank spaces at the bottom.
G. Surface panels shall have metal face trims with no sharp edges or corners. Finish surface
panel tubs to match face trim. Access panel on front may be screw type for access to
interior.
H. Flush panels shall have flush doors with concealed hinges and mounting clamps equal to
Square D Mono Flat, or ITE Decor trim.
I. Acceptable manufacturers: Panelboards shall match Secondary Distribution Equipment,
see section 26 20 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb and level, located as shown on the Drawings.
B. Arrange loads from served by the panel to balance the load currents as equally as possible
between the phases.
3.2 SPARE CONDUITS
A. Install a spare 3/4 -inch conduit from flush panels for each three single pole breakers or
spaces provided, minimum three conduits per panel. Terminate conduits above an
accessible ceiling or as directed.
END OF SECTION 26 24 00
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE TT SITE WORK ANT) RT TIT DING A
JOB NUMBER ADO5183.01
SECTION 26 27 26 26 27 26 - 1
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Provide wiring devices and plates or blank plates only for all outlet
boxes shown.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation Instructions and Maintenance Data.
D. Warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade with special devices as noted on the
Drawings. Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein without
reference to catalog number, such device shall be of same grade and manufacture as
specified below. Furnish a matching cap for all special purpose devices that do not have
the common 120 volt NEMA 5 -15R or 5 -20R configuration.
B. Comparable grade devices to those listed as manufactured by Leviton and Pass &
Seymour, are approved. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall be by
the same manufacturer and have identical appearance characteristics, unless noted
otherwise.
2.2 WALL SWITCHES
A. Line voltage switches, 20 ampere, 120 volt, quiet type, Hubbell 1221 series, gray exposed
finish.
B. Switch with pilot, lighted clear toggle, Hubbell 1221 -PL.
C. Keyed security switches: Pass & Seymour 20AC1 -KL
2.3 WALL BOX DIMMERS:
A. White finish, size for loads.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 27 26 262726 -2
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
B. Incandescent:
1. Modular full wave solid state unit with integral quiet on -off switch and audible
and electromagnetic noise filters.
2. Thin profile.
3. 1,000 watt (unless noted otherwise)
4. 120/277 volt rated.
5. Lutron Nova T (NT- 1000), Lutron Vareo (V -1000) or approved.
C. Fluorescent:
1. Modular full wave solid state unit with integral quiet on -off switch and audible
and electromagnetic noise filters.
2. Thin profile.
3. 1,000 watt (unless noted otherwise)
4. 120/277 volt rated.
5. Lutron Nova T, Lutron Vareo or approved. Verify compatibility of dimmer
switch with ballast being served.
2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SWITCHING BYPASS
A. Provide and install Emergency Shunt Relay (NC contact) where indicated on drawing or
herein. Emergency shunt relays are to be UL 924 listed devices.
B. .Products: (or approved substitute)
1. Lighting Control & Design, Inc. part number GR2001ES -120 -3
2. Nine 24, Inc. part number BTLC -R
3. Bodine part number GTD20A
4. WattStopper part numbers ELCU -100, ELCU -200
C. Operation: Upon loss of Normal (non- emergency) power, the contactor will close,
bypassing the room lighting switch and illuminating the luminaire.
2.5 EMERGENCY OFF PUSHBUTTONS:
A. Electrical panelboard remote emergency off switch, full guard, red pushbutton, nameplate
to read "POWER OFF" with stainless steel finish plate. Pushbutton to be connected to
panelboard shunt -trip main circuit breaker, Square D Class 9001 type SKRIRH13 with
KN499 nameplate, or approved.
B. Gas solenoid remote emergency on/off switch, full guard, yellow pushbutton, nameplate
to read "GAS ON /OFF" with stainless steel finish plate. Pushbutton to be connected to
gas system solenoid valve. Square D Class 9001 type SKRIYH13 with KN499
nameplate, or approved.
2.6 RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex: 20 ampere, 3 -wire, 2 -pole grounding, NEMA 5 -20R, Hubbell 5352 series, gray
exposed finish.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 27 26 26 27 26 - 3
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
B. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting (GFCl/GFI): 20 ampere, 3 -wire, 2 -pole grounding,
NEMA 5 -20R, gray exposed finish, Hubbell GFR5352 series or approved substitute.
C. Tamperproof Duplex: 20 ampere, 3 -wire, 2 -pole grounding, NEMA 5 -20R, Hubbell
HBL8300SGGY series, gray exposed finish.
D. Clock outlets: Hubbell No. 5235, gray receptacle, plate with clock hanger.
E. Special purpose receptacles: As noted on Drawings.
2.7 PLATES AND COVERS
A. Flush Finish Plates: .040 -inch thick, type 302 stainless steel, brush finish, Leviton or
Pass & Seymour.
B. Surface Covers: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2 -inch raised industrial type with
openings appropriate for device installed.
C. Weatherproof:
1. Damp locations: Hubbell HBL5205W0 cover mounted horizontally with hinges
up.
2.. Wet locations: Hubbell WP26M Thomas &Betts Red -Dot series CKNM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines.
B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or
splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted.
C. Wall- mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the
Drawings.
D. Receptacles shall be tested for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground faults.
Correct any defective wiring.
E. All special plugs provided with the receptacles shall be given to the Owner in their
cartons and a letter stating the date and the Owner's representative that received the
materials.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 28 00 26 28 00 - 1
CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SECTION 26 28 00 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OVERCURRENT DEVICES)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Provide overcurrent protective devices of the proper characteristics for the load
served.
2. Coordinate fuse size and circuit breaker combinations for selective tripping with
minimum interruption of service.
3. Provide fuses as indicated on the drawings, sized per NEC and appropriate for
the load served as required for a fully operational system.
4. All fuses shall be furnished of the same manufacturer.
5. All circuit breakers shall be furnished of the same manufacturer as the
distribution panel and branch panelboards.
6. All fuses shall be installed by the electrical contractor at job -site and only when
equipment is to be energized. Fuses shall not be installed during shipment.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions,
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods,
C. Section 26 20 00: Electrical Distribution System
D. Section 26 24 00: Switchboards and Panelboards
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation and Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSES
A. Provide 100,000 AIC, Current Limiting, UL, Time Delay Fuses.
B. For Feeders 601 amps to 6000 amps: Class L, KRP -CQSP Time Delay.
C. For Feeders 600 amps and less:
1. Class RK -1, LPS -RKQSP for 600 Volt, Dual Element.
2. Class RK -1, LPN -RKQSP for 250 Volt, Dual Element.
3. Class J, LPJQSP for 600 Volt & below, Dual Element.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION262800 262800 -2
CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
D. For Motor Circuits 600 Volts and Below: Class RK -1 and Class J Sized @ 125% FLC of
Motor.
E. Manufacturer: Bussmann System 300 Low -Peak, Littelfuse.
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type. Breakers shall have short
circuit capacity rating to withstand the maximum short circuit duty which can be
expected at the breaker location in the electrical system. Breakers mounted in branch
panelboards shall be of the bolt -in type.
B. Minimum short circuit rating for any circuit breaker: 10,000 A.I.C. for 120V and 208V
breakers, 22,000 A.I.C. for 277V and 480V breakers.
C. Provide circuit breaker lock -on handle guards to prevent accidental shut -off of equipment
for breakers supplying time clocks, refrigeration, fire alarm, unswitched egress lighting
and like systems.
2.3 SPARE FUSES AND SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Provide 10% spare fuses, but not less than (3) of any one size and type.
B. Provide Bussmann spare fuse cabinet(s) #SFC as required for spare fuses. Install cabinet
in electrical room.
2.4 SUBSTITUTION APPROVALS
A. If the electrical contractor wishes to furnish materials other than those specified, a written
request, along with a complete short circuit and selective coordination study, shall be
submitted to the engineer for evaluation at least 10 days prior to bid date. If the
engineer's evaluation indicates acceptance, a written addendum will be issued listing the
other acceptable manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FUSES
A. Install fuses for motor protection to best protect the motor without nuisance tripping.
B. Provide one complete set of spare fuses of each amperage used on this project. Store
spare fuses in a metal, hinged door cabinet located adjacent to the Main Distribution
Panel. Label cabinet.
C. Provide pullers for fuses, stored with fuses in cabinet.
END OF SECTION 26 28 00
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 28 16 26 28 16 - 1
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Provide manual or magnetic motor starters of the proper characteristics for
equipment as listed on the Drawings or not provided by Division 15, i.e.
overhead door operators.
2. Provide switches of proper characteristics as disconnecting means.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. All motor starters and disconnects shall be of the same manufacturer as service
equipment or load centers.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 26 28 00: Circuit Protective Devices
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation Instruction and Maintenance Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Manual starters, toggle type, quick -make, quick -break with thermal overload protection
and suitable enclosures.
B. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R where installed exposed to
the weather or designated by the subscript "WP ".
C. Magnetic starters, full voltage across the line non - reversing type, 120 volt coils, overload
relays in each leg, H -O -A selector switches, red running pilot lights, auxiliary contacts,
120V control transformers and suitable enclosures. The starters shall be combination
type with fusible switches where shown adjacent to the disconnect switch.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 28 16 262816 -2
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.2 DISCONNECTS
A. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick -make,
quick- break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage
and the load served. Switches shall be equipped with a defeatable cover interlock.
B. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R where installed exposed to
the weather or designated by the subscript "WP ".
C. Disconnects shall be fusible or non - fusible as designated on Drawings and/or required by
code.
•
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEARANCES
A. Maintain all code required clearances under this work.
3.2 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Provide the motor starting equipment as shown on the Drawings and coordinate all motor
"overload" starter relays.
B. Install the starters at the respective equipment unless shown otherwise.
3.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Provide all code required disconnect switches under this work whether specifically
shown or not.
B. Disconnect switches required when equipment is not in sight of the branch circuit panel
or starter may be horsepower rated, toggle type in suitable enclosure, mounted at or on
the equipment.
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 50 00 26 50 00 - 1
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a fixture of type
designated and appropriate for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings
without a type designation shall have a fixture the same as those used in similar
• or like locations.
2. Where a fixture type designation has been omitted and cannot be determined by
the Contractor, request a clarification from the Architect and provide a suitable
fixture type as directed at no additional cost.
3. Coordinate installation of lighting fixtures with the ceiling installation and all
other trades to provide a total system that is neat and orderly in appearance.
4. Verify ceiling types with architectural specifications and drawings.
5. Provide luminaires complete with lamps, ballasts, reflectors, diffusers, lenses,
shielding, hangers, accessories and fittings.
6. Store and handle so as not to subject materials to corrosion or mechanical
damage from environment and /or construction.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 00 00: General Provisions
B. Section 26 05 00: Basic Materials and Methods
C. Section 26 05 33: Conduits, Raceways, Boxes and Fittings
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaires shall be U.L. listed and be manufactured in accordance with appropriate U.L.
and ANSI standards and shall bear U.L. label appropriate for intended use.
B. The lighting designated for this project was based on fixture types and manufacturers as
specified. If substitution of other than those specified is proposed for an alternate,
provide the data and the operating fixtures both as specified and alleged equal. The
Architect/Engineer reserves the right to request full photometric analysis of area affected
by the proposed substitution prior to acceptance or denial.
C. Equality shall be determined by comparisons of actual fixtures and the following fixture
characteristics.
1. Performance:
a Distribution
b Utilization
c Average brightness /maximum brightness
d Spacing to mounting height ratio
e Comfort probability
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 50 00 26 50 00 - 2
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
f Energy life -cycle analysis.
2. Construction:
a Engineering
b Workmanship
c Rigidity
d Permanence of materials and fmishes; Durability
3. Installation Ease:
a Captive parts and captive hardware
b Provision for leveling
c Through - wiring ease
4. Maintenance:
a Relamping ease
b Replacement of ballast and lamp sockets
5. Appearance:
a Light tightness
b Neat, trim styling
c Aesthetic architectural value
6: Availability:
a Lead time
7. Sustainable Design Performance Indicators:
a Environmental performance in manufacturing
Manufacturing- sustainability- policies
ISO 14001 certification or equivalent environmental management
systems.
d ISO 9001 certification for quality assurance
e Annual environmental performance or sustainability reports.
f Environmentally responsible materials and resources.
g Regional availability of materials and resources.
h Regional production and manufacturing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data.
C. Operation Instruction and Maintenance Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Recessed fixtures shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which
they are installed without leaks or gaps. Contractor to verify ceiling types at all locations
and provide appropriate trim kit for each fixture. Where necessary, install heat resistant
non - rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks or moisture from entering between fixture trim
and the surface to which they are mounted.
B. Fixtures installed under canopies, roof or open porches, and similar damp or wet
locations shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for damp or wet locations.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE H SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 50 00 26 50 00 - 3
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recessed luminaires shall be IC -rated when installed at locations where insulation will
come in direct contact with fixture. Contractor to verify ceiling assembly makeup at all
fixture locations.
2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Prismatic diffusers shall be extruded of clear acrylic plastic, 0.125 -inch overall thickness,
No. 12 pattern as manufactured by KHS unless otherwise specified in the fixture schedule
by catalog number or remarks.
B. Finish shall be white baked enamel, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average
reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall
be prepared for finishing with a 5 -step zinc phosphating process.
C. Provide fixtures of lengths as shown on drawings. For continuous fixtures, furnish joiner
plates, end plates and all required fittings.
2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES
A. Ballasts shall be CBM labeled, high power factor, constant wattage auto - transformer
type.
2.5 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES
A. Fixture dimensions shall be proper for the various wattages noted on the plans and as
recommended by the fixture manufacturer or as specified.
B. Aligners shall be of the ball type providing nominally 45 degree movement either side of
center.
2.6 LAMPS
A. Lamp each fixture with the suitable lamp cataloged for the specific fixture type and as
indicated as manufactured by General Electric, Osram/Sylvania, Philips or approved
equal.
B. Incandescent lamps, inside frosted, 130 volt rated except where otherwise specified.
Provide reflector lamp for fixtures designed and cataloged for such lamps unless
specified otherwise, 130 volt rated.
C. Fluorescent lamps, F32T8/TL835 for general use with other types as required by the
fixture specified. CRI minimum 85, color 3500 K.
1 D. Metal halide lamps, clear mogul base, wattage as listed for the fixture specified.
E. High pressure sodium lamps, clear, color improved, mogul base.
F. Provide shop drawing documentation on all lamps being utilized on project. Information
shall include but not limited to wattage, CRI, lamp life, color and manufacturer.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 50 00 26 50 00 - 4
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
2.7 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent
1. Electronic ballasts shall be EBT SSB3- 120/277 -1/32 LH (1 lamp T -8), SSB3 -
120/277 -2/32 LH (2 lamp T -8) or equivalent manufactured by Advance or
Motorola. Provide documentation at time of shop drawings for all ballasts
utilized on project.
2.8 FLUORESCENT BATTERY BACKUP BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Battery backups ballasts for luminaires with T8 or T5 lamps will have a
minimum initial output of 1400 lumens. Lithonia PS 1400 or approved substitute.
B. Fluorescent Battery backups ballasts for luminaires with compact fluorescent lamps will
have a minimum initial output of 500 lumens. Lithonia PSDL series or approved
substitute.
2.9 POLES AND BASES
A. Each pole shall have adequate strength and rigidity to withstand wind rating at site, not
less than 100 mph winds without damage to the poles and attached fixtures and lamps.
Pole bases shall be equipped with handholes with matching covers, and - base bolt covers.
B. Anchor bolts shall be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and threads cleared. Nuts,
washers, and other hardware and fittings shall be corrosion resistant alloy material of
adequate strength. Unless otherwise indicated, Indicated pole heights are above the top
of the concrete base.
C. Provide reinforced concrete base for all poles and bollards as indicated on drawings. If
not shown on drawings, submit detail indicating base. Provide unreinforced concrete
base for ground- mounted /stanchion- mounted landscape or floodlight fixtures.
2.10 LIGHTING LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
A. See Drawings.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Determine ceiling types in each area and provide suitable mounting frames where
required for recessed fixtures.
B. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in
operation. If fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the
Contractor shall clean them at no additional cost to the Owner.
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 26 50 00 26 50 00 - 5
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
C. Fixtures shall be carefully aligned, leveled in straight lines, and located as shown on the
architectural reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and
alignment, shall be given by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported by separate
means from the building structure per applicable seismic requirements and not from the
ceiling system, ductwork, piping or other systems.
D. Fixtures shall be aimed or installed to provide the lighting pattern for which the fixture is
designed.
E. Fixtures recessed into fire -rated ceiling assemblies shall include system maintaining such
rating around fixture.
F. Fixtures located in Mechanical rooms and storage /utility rooms to be coordinated with
duct work, piping and structural members. Adjust stems as required for proper
illumination of the area.
G. Set poles straight and plumb and grout around pole base as required.
3.2 WIRING
A. Recessed fixtures served from a junction box above the ceiling may be connected with
3/8 -inch flex, 2 No. 18. Provide 3 No. 18 wires where dual circuiting is called for.
Provide - grounds continuity.
END OF SECTION 26 50 00
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
Division Thirty Two
SECTION 32 1413 32 1413 - 1
DECORATIVE BRICK PAVING
SECTION 32 1413 - DECORATIVE BRICK PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Brick paver bands in enhanced paving.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 — Cast in Place Concrete
B. Section 32 91 13 — Soil Preparation
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's drawings and details: Indicate perimeter conditions, relationship to adjoining
materials and assemblies, concrete paver layout, pattern, color arrangement, and installation
details.
B. Sieve analysis per ASTM C 136 for grading of bedding and joint sand.
C. Brick Masonry Units:
1. Four representative fiill -size samples of the paver type, thickness, color, finish that
indicates the range of color variation and texture expected in the finished installation.
Color selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's available colors.
2. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work.
3. Test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit
requirements to ASTM C 93.
4. Manufacturer's certification of Brick by ICPI as having met applicable ASTM standards.
5. Manufacturer's catalog product data, installation instructions, and material safety data
sheets for the safe handling of the specified materials and products.
6. Albedo data: Provide infonnation identifying the reflectance of the following products
provided under work of this section.
D. Brick Installation Subcontractor:
1. A copy of Subcontractor's current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement
Institutes Concrete Paver Installer Certificate.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paving Subcontractor Qualifications:
1. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paver installations similar in
design, material, and extend indicated on this project.
2. Utilize an installer holding a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement
Institutes Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.
B. Mock -Ups:
1. Install a 4 paver x 4 Brick area (5.33' x 5.33' paver area).
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01'
SECTION 32 1413 32 1413 - 2
DECORATIVE BRICK PAVING
2. Use this area to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying
pattern, color and texture of the job.
3. This area will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged.
4. Subject to acceptance by Architect, mock -up may be retained as part of finished work.
5. If mock -up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock -up.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead -time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers/
packaging with identification labels intact.
1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of
buildings adjacent to paving.
2. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded or plastic wrapped
packaging capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift.
3. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product.
C. Storage and Handling: Protect stored products from mud, dirt and other foreign materials.
1. Cover bedding sand and joint sand with waterproof covering if needed to prevent
exposure to rainfall or removal by wind. Secure the cover in place.
1.6 PROJECT/ SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sand or brick during heavy rain or snowfall.
B. Do not install sand and brick over frozen base material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK PAVING UNITS
A. Manufacturer: Mutual Materials
B. Style: Holland
C. Color: Rustic Blend
D. Pattern: Herringbone
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
2.3 BEDDING AND JOINT SAND
A. Provide bedding and joint sand as follows:
1. Clean, non - plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically shaped, natural
or manufactured from crushed rock.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 1413 32 1413 - 3
DECORATIVE BRICK PAVING
2. Do not use limestone screenings, or stone dust, or sand for the bedding sand material that
does not conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33.
3. Do not use mason sand, or sand conforming to ASTM C 144 for the bedding sand.
4. Sieve according to ASTM C 136.
5. Bedding sand material requirements: Conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C
33 with modifications as shown in Table 1.
6. Joint sand material requirements: Conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Site Verification of Conditions:
1. General Contractor shall inspect, accept and certify in writing to the paver installation
subcontractor that site conditions meet specifications for the following items prior to
installation of interlocking concrete pavers.,
Note: Compaction of the soil subgrade is recommended to at least 98% standard Proctor density per
ASTM D 698 for pedestrian areas and residential driveways. Compaction to at Least 98% modified
Proctor density per ASTM D 1557 is recommended for areas subject to heavy vehicular traffic.
Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated subgrade
soils.
a. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to
specified requirements.
b. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to drawings and
specifications.
Note: Prior to screening the bedding sand, the recommended base surface tolerance should be * 3 / 8
in. (10 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) straight edge. See ICPI Tech Spec 2, Construction of Interlocking
Concrete Pavements for further guidance on construction practices.
Note: The elevations and surface tolerance of the base determine the final surface elevations of
concrete pavers. The paver installation contractor cannot correct deficiencies in the base surface with
additional bedding sand or by other means. Therefore, the surface elevations of the base should be
checked and accepted by the General Contractor or designated party, with written certification to the
paving subcontractor, prior to placing bedding sand and concrete pavers.
c. Verify that Aggregate base materials, thickness, compacted density, surface
tolerances and elevations conform to specified requirements.
d. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade, aggregate base materials to
the Owner, General Contractor and paver installation subcontractor.
e. Verify location, type, and elevations of concrete edge restraints.
2. Do not proceed with installation of bedding sand and interlocking concrete pavers until
subgrade soil and base conditions are corrected by the General Contractor or designated
subcontractor.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 1413 32 1413 - 4
DECORATIVE BRICK PAVING
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade, granular base or stabilized soil is acceptable and ready to support
paving and imposed loads.
1. Verify subsoils have a permeability between 0.5 and 3.0 inches per hour.
2. Compact to minimum 95 percent Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 689 for
pedestrian areas.
B. Concrete Paver Edge Restraint Preparation:
1. Install edge restraints per the drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install pervious paving system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The final surface tolerance from grade elevations shall not deviate more than ± 3 / 8 in. (10 mm)
under a 10 ft (3 m) straightedge.
B. Check final surface elevations for conformance to drawings.
C. The surface elevations of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 nun) above adjacent drainage
inlets concrete collars or channels.
D. Lippage: No greater than 1/8 in. (3mm) difference in height between adjacent pavers.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. After work in this section is complete, the General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting
work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.
END OF SECTION
•
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8243 32 8243 - 1
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 32 8243 — IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide irrigation system as described on drawings and specifications herein.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 32 8425 — Drip Irrigation
B. Section 32 9300 - Plants
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Layout:
1. The layout of the imgation system is diagrammatic. Follow as closely as practicable.
Contractor shall provide for adequate water coverage for healthy plant growth without
over spraying paved areas.
2. Before proceeding with the installation of each section or unit of the irrigation system,
check and verify the correlation between ground measurements and the drawings.
3. No changes, alterations, omissions from or additions to the work shall be made without
the approval of the Landscape Architect.
B. Testing and Inspection: Notify the Landscape Architect 24 hours or one working day in
advance of inspections or tests required for the work.
C. Obtain and pay for any permits and /or inspections required by governing agencies and utility
companies. Conform to local codes governing work described in these specifications.
D. Maintain during construction and provide the Owner with exact "as built" drawings showing
arrangement and locations of all lines, valves, heads, etc. Major underground elements shall
be noted with triangular measurements from a permanent feature. These shall be prepared on
reproducible velum or mylar drawing material.
E. Contractor shall conduct a final walk through with the Owner's representative to review
operating procedures, equipment technical requirements and locations of system components.
F. Contractor shall be licensed in the State in which the project is located to install imgation
systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit within 10 days after date indicated in the Notice to Proceed.
B. Product Data: Submit to the Landscape Architect one set of manufacturer's technical data,
installation instructions, operating instructions, and maintenance procedures for Automatic
Controller.
C. Irrigators license: A copy shall be submitted to Landscape Architect prior to any work being
done.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8243 32 8243 - 2
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
D. "As Built" Drawing: At completion of system installation submit two copies of "as built"
Drawings to Landscape Architect for review. Upon approval of Landscape Architect submit
original reproducible "as built" Drawing to Owner.
1.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
A. Provide adequate means of projection during excavations and installation of work. Damaged
utilities and/or underground facilities shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Owner
and shall be repaired promptly.
1.6 GUARANTEES
A. Unless provided otherwise, guarantee against all defects and malfunctions due to faulty
workmanship or defective material for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance
by the Owner. Upon being informed by Owner of any defects or malfunctions, effect all
necessary repairs and/or replace in a reasonable expedient manner at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B. Emergency repairs, when necessary, may be made by the Owner without relieving the
contractor of his guarantee obligation.
C. Repair any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the guarantee period.
D. If the Contractor does not respond to the Owner's request for repair work within a period of
15 days, the Owner may proceed with such necessary repairs and charge the Contractor for
all expenses incurred in the repair work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. PVC Pipe:
1. Main Lines: Schedule 40 PVC
2. Sleeving: Schedule 40 PVC
3. Lateral Lines and Sleeves: Class 200 PVC
4. Fittings:
a. Solvent Welded Socket Type: ASTM D 2466, PVC pipe fittings, Schedule 40.
b. Threaded Type: ASTM D 2466, PVC pipe fittings, Schedule 80.
5. Jointing Material:
a. PVC Solvent Cement: NFS approved solvent for PVC through 4 inch, meeting
requirements of ASTM D 2564.
b. PVC Primer and Cleaner: Compatible with or designed for PVC pipe.
c. Teflon Tape Sealer: 1/2 -inch wide, used at all threaded joints.
B. Poly -pipe and Fittings: Thick walled polyethylene pipe specifically designed for connection
of irrigation sprinklers to lateral lines. Fittings shall be those specifically designed for use
with poly -pipe.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8243 32 8243 - 3
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
2.2 VALVES
A. Install all valves except quick couplers in the specified boxes.
B. Gate Valve: as specified on plans
C. Quick Coupler Valves: Nibco T -17 or approved equal.
D. Remote Control Valves: Rainbird 100 - PESB -PRS -D & 150 - PESB -PRS -D remote control
valves or approved equal. Size as noted on Irrigation Plan.
E. Manual Drain Valve: as specified on plans
2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Automatic Controller: Rainbird ESP -LX Modular Controller, with additional modules to
accommodate 24 valves. In outdoor enclosure.
B. Rainbird ET Sensor with Rain Clik
2.4 VALVE BOXES
A. Gate Valves: Heavy duty round plastic box with a 6 -1/2 inch diameter snap fit cover, with
the words "Valve Box" in raised letters on the lid. Provide three "T" handle socket wrenches
of 5/8 -inch round stock with sufficient length to extend two feet above the top of the deepest
valve box cover.
B. Automatic Remote Control Valves: Heavy duty plastic box Ametek or as shown on plans,
size as required, with locking cover, with the words "Control Valve" on the lid in raised
letters.
C. Double Check Valve: Heavy duty plastic box Ametek or approved equal, size as required,
with locking cover
2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Rainbird Van, MPR, U and 15 Strip Series, models as shown on plans.
2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS:
A. Febco 850 or approved equal.
2.7 QUICK COUPLERS:
A. Rainbird with purple thermoplastic rubber cover or approved equal. Furnish hose swivels
and operating keys for each size coupler to Owner.
2.8 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRE
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8243 32 8243 - 4
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Wire: Solid copper or stranded copper wire, UL listed for direct burial in ground. Size of
wire shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, but in no case less than
number 14.
•
2.9 AGGREGATES
A. Drainage rock: Washed rounded river pea gravel.
2.10 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT
A. Use equipment which meets or exceeds city and state codes or standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Storage: Store PVC pipe and fittings out of direct sunlight.
B. Environmental Conditions: In freezing weather (below 45F) or in extreme heat (above 85F),
no solvent welding of PVC pipe will be permitted. In rainy weather, solvent weld PVC pipe
only under cover.
C. Inspection: Do not allow any work to be covered or enclosed until it has been inspected and
pressure tested.
D. Installation of all materials and equipment shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's
written specifications and recommendations, local and state codes.
3.2 TRENCHING
A. Install pipe in trenches straight or "snaked" slightly, allowing for expansion and contraction
of PVC pipes. Allow sufficient width to tamp around pipe.
B. Trench bottoms on uniform slopes, with no variations in grade. Bottoms shall be smooth and
free of sharp rocks or other objects that may damage pipes.
C. Allow minimum coverage depth as follows:
1. Lateral lines: 12 inches
2. Main line pipe: 18 inches
3. All lines below pavement 18 inches
D. Backfill excess excavation with suitable material free of rock or other materials that may
damage pipe. Thoroughly compact to give full support to the pipe.
E. Provide bell holes in base of trench to ensure support of pipe over its entire Length.
F. Fill piping with water at approximately 25 PSI during backfilling operation.
G. Backfill to finish grade, place backfill carefully around and over piping, removing rock or
other material that may damage pipe; wet and tamp earth in layers not over 6 inches thick
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8243 32 8243 - 5
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
until thoroughly compacted and settled. Top layer to be topsoil quality and depth as specified
in Section 32 9113.
H. Remove all excess excavated material from project site. Dispose legally.
3.3 PIPE
A. Lay PVC pipe in accordance with standard and acceptable practice.
B. Slope main line and lateral pipes at 1/2% minimum to drain.
C. PVC pipe joints, solvent welded except as indicated. Cut pipe square, debur, wipe from
surface all saw chips, dust, dirt, moisture and any foreign matter which may contaminate the
cemented joint. Apply cleaner /primer and solvent cement, make joints in accordance with
manufacture's recommendations. Use Teflon thread sealant (tape or liquid) at all treaded
joints.
D. G.I. Piping: Clean out threads of standard lengths, not more than two threads showing at
joints. Make joints up with pipe compound applied to male threads only.
3.4 CONTROL VALVES
A. Install complete with valve boxes automatic control valves as indicated on Drawings and
Details.
B. Provide threaded union at each automatic control valve.
3.5 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Install complete sprinkler heads as indicated on Drawings and Details.
B. All sprinklers shall be installed on an adjustable riser assembly (double swing joint)
assembled by the use of at least three (3) street ells as indicated on the construction detail.
C. Install sprinkler heads of types, sizes, and coverage called for in the irrigation legend, at the
locations shown and as indicated on drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Landscape
Contractor to ensure complete irrigation coverage.
D. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to the finished grade unless otherwise indicated
on the plans or construction details.
3.6 SLEEVING
A. Install under all pavement for passage of control wiring and piping; minimum of 18 inches
deep. Solvent weld joints, make watertight. Schedule 40 PVC size indicated on Drawing.
3.7 CONTROL WIRING
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8243 32 8243 - 6
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Lay in trenches under supply or branch lines when practical, for maximum protection,
minimum depth 18 inches. Place in conduit where required.
B. Single wires (red) to each solenoid from control and a common neutral wire (white) to all
solenoids from the control. Wire sizes shall meet minimum requirements of manufacturer of
automatic control valves installed.
C. Make all splices moisture proof using specified electrical connectors. Bundle wires together
and wrap with electrical tape at 5 foot intervals. Provide expansion curls at least every 100
feet of wire on nms more than 100 feet in length. Provide 18 inches of slack at connection to
control valves.
3.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER
A. Unless otherwise specified, the installation of the automatic controller shall include the
furnishing and installing of concrete, sleeves, brackets, electrical work, controllers, and all
other work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and construction details.
B. Automatic controller shall be set plumb and level at the location indicated on the plans or as
directed by Owner.
C. Automatic controllers shall be the type and size indicated on the plans.
B. Install ET sensor according to manufacturers instructions, at the location indicated on the
plans or as directed by Owner.
3.9 FLUSHING AND TESTING
A. All mainlines shall be thoroughly flushed prior to backfilling and the installation of control
valves.
B. After flushing, all mainline outlets shall be capped or plugged tight and mainline shall be
tested under maximum operating pressure for not less than 1 hour and inspected for leakage
by Landscape Architect.
C. Upon approval by Landscape Architect of pressure test, mainline may be backfilled.
D. After control valves are installed, lateral lines shall be flushed one at a time for a sufficient
period of time to ensure thorough cleaning.
E. After lateral lines are flushed, sprinkler heads may be installed and tested for operation.
F. Upon completion and approval of the system the contractor will provide a walk through
demonstration to the Owner's representative and /or Landscape Architect of the completed
irrigation system. During the walk through the Contractor will point out how to operate the
system, where everything is located and provide other needed information.
G. Provide a manual of equipment installed in this job, listing make and model of each piece.
3.10 CLEAN - UP
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8243 32 8243 - 7
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Keep premises reasonably free from accumulation of debris.
B. On completion of each division of work, remove all debris, equipment and surplus material
and leave the premises in an orderly and neat fashion.
END SECTION
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8425 32 8425 - 1
DRIP IRRIGATION
SECTION 32 8425 — DRIP IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
•
A. The work required under this Section consists of furnishing all labor materials, equipment,
services and related items necessary to complete all irrigation system work, and all related
work, complete as indicated on the drawings or specified herein.
B. The major items of work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Verify utility locations.
2. Removal, protection and /or restoration of all existing improvements.
3. Location of lines, minor excavation if necessary.
4. Furnishing and installing a fully operational automatically controlled irrigation system,
including all mains, laterals, fittings, quick coupling valves, gate valves, and drain valves,
backflow preventer, etc.
5. Testing of system and making it operative.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions Division 1, apply
to work of this section.
1. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturing irrigation systems
materials and products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms who have successfully completed execution of a minimum of
five (5) contracts involving the installation of irrigation and piping work similar in size and
scope to that required for this project. Such experience should be able to be demonstrated
through references.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. Comply with all applicable state and local ordinances and codes.
2. All materials and work shall meet the requirements of the A.W.W.A., A.S.S.E. and the
USC Foundation for Cross Connection Control.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for all
irrigation system materials and products.
B. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed irrigation system
piping and products, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8425 32 8425 - 2
DRIP IRRIGATION
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for irrigation system materials and
products. Include these data, product data, shop drawings and record drawings in maintenance
manual, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1. 5 UTILITIES AND PROTECTION
Existing Utilities:
A. Contractor shall acquaint himself/herself with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on
the plans be found, contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to further
action. Failure to do so will make Contractor liable for any and all damage there to arising
from his/her operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on plan.
B. Plans are diagrammatic. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the Layout as may be
required.
1. 6 PERMITS AND FEES
Obtain all permits and pay required fees to any governmental agency having jurisdiction over
the work. Inspections required by local ordinances during the course of construction shall be
arranged as required. On completion of the work, satisfactory evidence shall be furnished to
Owner to show that all work has been installed in accordance with the ordinances and code
requirements.
1. 7 DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAIL SHEETS
Scale and Dimensions:
A. Consider drawings and specifications as being compatible and therefore work called for by one
and not the other shall be furnished and installed as though called for by both. When
discrepancies exist between scale and dimension or between the work to be accomplished by
each trade, they shall be called to the Landscape Architect's attention immediately. The
Landscape Architect's decision regarding such discrepancies shall be final and binding.
B. Where diagrams have been made to show piping connections, etc., Contractor is cautioned that
these diagrams must not be used for obtaining lineal runs or number and type of fittings.
C. All measurements shall be verified at the site. Drawings may not be exactly to scale.
1. 8 PIPING ARRANGEMENT
Suggestions for changes in location of piping, etc., advisable in the opinion of the Contractor,
shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect for approval before proceeding with the work,
with written assurance that such changes will not cause any extra cost on their part or alteration
of design requirements.
1.9 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all work done for one (1) year from date of acceptance against all defects in material,
equipment and workmanship. Guarantee shall cover repair of damage to any part of the
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8425 32 8425 - 3
DRIP IRRIGATION
premises resulting from leaks, or other defects in material, equipment and workmanship to the
satisfaction of the Owner. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly, at no cost to the Owner.
B. Guarantee will include spring start-up and winterizing of system within the one (1) year time
and development of approved water application schedule. Winter damage due to improper
winterization is the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. All repairs and servicing required under the guarantee period shall be made under the
observation of the maintenance crew to help train them in the proper operation and repair of the
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
I . Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure
ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as
determine by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
2. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition.
•
B. PVC Pipe:
1. Main Lines: Class 200 PVC
2. Lateral Lines and Sleeves: Class 200 PVC
3. Fittings:
a. Solvent Welded Socket Type: ASTM D 2466, PVC pipe fittings, Schedule 40.
b. Threaded Type: ASTM D 2466, PVC pipe fittings, Schedule 80.
4. Jointing Material:
a. PVC Solvent Cement: NFS approved solvent for PVC through 4 inch, meeting
requirements of ASTM D 2564.
b. PVC Primer and Cleaner: Compatible with or designed for PVC pipe.
c. Teflon Tape Sealer: 1/2 -inch wide, used at all threaded joints.
C. Valves:
1. Gate /Drain Valves: Shall be sized for mains.
2. Remote Control Valves: Rainbird 100 -PESB size as shown
D. Dripline and Integral Dripline Components:
Rainbird XF Series Dripline model XFD -09 -12 or approved equal.
1. Line Flushing Valves: All systems shall be installed with Rainbird Line Flushing Valves
(or approved substitution) as indicated on drawings.
2. Air Release Valves: All systems shall be installed with Rainbird Air Release Valves as
appropriate locations for system function.
3. Disc Filter & Pressure Regulator: A disc filter and pressure regulator shall be installed at
each zone valve (as part of an integrated drip zone kit) to ensure proper filtration.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8425 32 8425 - 4
•
DRIP IRRIGATION
E. Tree Bubbler Components:
Rainbird 1402 Bubbler
E. Control Wires: 24 -Volt solid wire, UL approved for direct burial in ground. Minimum wire
size shall be 18 gauge. All wire to be Paige wire or approved substitution.
F. Expansion Curls: Expansion curls shall be provided within three (3') feet of each wire
connection to solenoid and at least every three hundred (300') feet in length. (Expansion curls
•
are formed by wrapping at least five (5) turns of wire around a rod or pipe 1" or more in
diameter, then withdrawing the rod).
G. Sleeves for Irrigation Pipe: Where necessary and where indicated on drawings, pipe or as
otherwise approved by the Project Consultant. To be two (2) tunes the O.D. of sleeved pipe.
H. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be of appropriate size and type for valves specified or as
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
I. Drains: Air hose connections of approved design shall be provided for winterizing at several
locations so that the entire system can be drained by blowing it out with compressed air. The
compressor shall be capable of varying pressures.
•
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Storage: Store PVC pipe and fittings out of direct sunlight.
B. Environmental Conditions: In freezing weather (below 45F) or in extreme heat (above 85F), no
solvent welding of PVC pipe will be permitted. In rainy weather, solvent weld PVC pipe only
under cover.
3. 2 INSPECTION
General: Examine areas and conditions under which irrigation system's materials and products
are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. Do not allow any work to be covered or enclosed
until it has been inspected and pressure tested.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION
General: Maintain all warning signs, shoring, barricades, flares and red lanterns as required by
safety orders of the Division of Industrial safety and local ordinances.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Assembly:
1. Install remote valves where shown and group together where practical.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8425 32 8425 - 5
DRIP IRRIGATION
2. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Project Consultant, trench or weather
conditions are unsuitable. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the
installed pipe shall be closed by approved means to prevent entrance of trench water and
other foreign material into the line(s).
i
3. Pipe and fittings shall be joined using methods as recommended by the manufacturer of
the pipe, except where screwed connections are required. Pipe and fittings shall be
thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before applying solvent with a non -
synthetic bristle brush.
4. Pipe may be assembled and joined on the surface. Snake pipe from side to side to allow
for expansion and contraction.
5. Make all connections between plastic pipe and metal valves or steel pipe with threaded
fittings using plastic male adapters.
B. Dripline Installation:
1. 'Install all dripline as indicated on drawings. Use only Teflon tape (or approved
substitution) on all threaded connections.
2. Clamp fittings with Oetiker (or approved substitution) clamps when operating pressure
exceeds specific dripline fitting requirements.
3. Cap or plug all openings as soon as lines have been installed to prevent the entrance of
materials that would obstruct the pipe. Leave in place until removal is necessary for
completion of installation.
4. Thoroughly flush all water lines before installing valves and other hydrants.
5. Test in accordance with Paragraph on Hydrostatic Tests.
C. Automatic Controllers: Connect remote control valves to controller in a logical sequence to
correspond with specification of the Owner or Landscape Architect.
D. Automatic Control Wiring:
1. Install control wires, and laterals in common trenches whenever possible.
2. Install control wires below finish grade when possible and lay to the side and below main
line. Provide expansion curls as described herein.
3. Control wire splices will be allowed only in runs more than five hundred (500') feet.
Connections of all underground wires shall by the use of wire nuts, covered with
waterproof splice for each wire per installation instructions provided by the manufacturer,
or as otherwise required by local ordinance.
4. All wires passing under existing or future paving, construction, etc., shall be encased in
plastic or galvanized steel conduit extending at least twelve (12 ") inches beyond edges of
paving or constructions.
F. Backfilling and Compacting:
1. Dress off all areas to finish grades.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hydrostatic Test:
1. Request the presence of the Owner and/or Project Consultant at least forty-eight (48)
hours in advance of testing.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 8425 32 8425 - 6
DRIP IRRIGATION
2. Testing to be accomplished at the expense of the Contractor, and in the presence of the •
Owner.
3. Apply a continuous and static water pressure of sixty (30) PSI when welded plastic joints
have cured at least twenty -four (24) hours and with the risers capped as follows:
a. Main lines and sub mains to be tested for one (1) hour.
b. Lateral lines to be tested for one (1) hour.
4. Repair leaks resulting from tests.
5. The lines shall then be retested until satisfactory.
3.6 INSTRUCTIONS
After completion and testing of the system, the Contractor will instruct the Owner's personnel
in the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
3.7 CLEAN - UP:
A. Keep premises reasonably free from accumulation of debris.
B. On completion of each division of work, remove all debris, equipment and surplus material and
leave the premises in an orderly and neat fashion.
3.8 PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for work until finally inspected, tested and accepted. After
delivery, and before and after installation, protect work against theft, injury or damage. Protect
open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction, to prevent entry of
obstruction material.
END SECTION
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 9113 32 9113 - 1
SOIL PREPARATION
SECTION 32 9113 — SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
•
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Soil preparation and amendments as indicated on drawings and specifications
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 32 9300; Plants
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Quantity certifications of fertilizer, topsoil, compost mulch, and bark mulch delivered to site.
B. Sample of topsoil to Landscape Architect for approval prior to delivery to site.
C. Sample of compost prior to delivery to site.
D. Sample of premixed CU Structural Soil prior to delivery to site.
E. Copy of State Landscape Contractors license prior to commencement of work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All Structural Soil shall be mixed using appropriate soil measuring, mixing, and shredding
equipment of sufficient capacity and capability to assure proper quality control and consistent
mix ratios.
B. Structural soil must be mixed in the presence of the licensee, and no soil shall be placed until
inspected by the licensee. No mixing of Structural Soil on site is permitted.
C. Structural soil components and the finished mixture shall be protected from excess water
absorption and erosion at all times. Do not store materials unprotected from rainfall, nor allow
excess water to enter the site prior to compaction.
D. The licensed CU Structural Soil producer shall add soil amendments to alter soil fertility,
including fertilizer and pH adjustment at the rates recommended by soil test results.
E. The Contractor shall mix sufficient quantity in advance of the time the material is needed at the
job site to allow adequate time for the required quality control testing. Storage piles shall be
protected from rain and erosion by covering with plastic sheeting.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Do not mix or transport structural soil when rain is expected. Place pavement or planting bed
mix immediately after placing and compacting structural soil to prevent excessive hydration.
1. No structural Soil shall be mixed or placed in the air temperatures below 40 °F or
delivered or placed in frozen, wet or muddy conditions.
2. Material shall be delivered at or near optimal compaction moisture content, as determined
by AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698).
3. No material shall be delivered or placed in an excessively moist condition, beyond two
percent (2 %) above optimal compaction moisture content, as determined by AASHTO T
99 (ASTM D 698).
SECTION 32 9113 32 9113 - 1
SOIL PREPARATION
B. Deliver fertilizer to site in original unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guarantied
analysis.
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect utility lines, storm drainage lines, site improvements, and underground sprinkler system
during rototilling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS:
A. CU S tructural Soil
B. Compost Mulch
C. Bark Mulch
D. Organic Commercial Fertilizer
E. Lime
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL SOIL
A. Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect of any subsurface conditions which will affect
the Contractor's ability to complete the work, and shall locate and confine the locations of all
underground utility lines and structures prior to starting any excavation in the area to receive
Structural Soil by calling local utility agencies. The Contractor shall be liable to repair any
damage to underground utilities or structures caused by their activity during the progress of this
work, at their own expense.
B. Structural Soil shall only be installed after the installation of all walls, curbs, footings and
utility work in the area has been completed. For site elements dependent on the Structural Soil
for foundation support, postpone installation until immediately after the installation of the
Structural Soil. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage caused by the
installation of structural soil and all disturbed areas shall be restored to their original condition,
to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect.
C. The Contractor shall excavate and compact the proposed subgrade to the required depths and
dimensions indicated on the drawings or as directed in the field. Do not over excavate
compacted subgrades of adjacent pavement or structures. Confirm that the subgrade is at the
proper elevation and compacted as required. The excavation shall be cleared of all construction
debris, trash, rubble, and foreign material.
D. Install the first six inch (6 ") lift of Structural Soil mix over the prepared subgrade. Install
succeeding layers in six inch (6 ") lifts and compact each lift. Compact all materials to not less
than ninety five percent (95 %) of peak dry density from a standard AASHTO compaction curve
(AASHTO T 99). No compaction shall occur when moisture content exceeds the maximum
listed herein. Delay compaction at least twenty four (24) hours if moisture content exceeds the
SECTION 32 9113 32 9113 - 1
SOIL PREPARATION
maximum allowable, and protect the Structural Soil during delays in compaction with plastic or
plywood, as directed by the Forester.
E. Structural soil shall be installed to the depths indicated on the drawings.
F. Prior to placing pavement or planting mix, the licensed CU -Soil® provider and the Forester
shall check the Structural Soil material for consistency with the color and texture of the
• approved sample supplied by the Contractor. In the event that the material supplied varies
significantly from the approved sample, the Forester may request that the Contractor test the
installed Structural Soil. Any mix which varies significantly from the approved testing results,
as determined by Forester, shall be removed and new Structural Soil installed that meets the
specifications.
3.2 PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS
A. Remove or spray as required to eradicate noxious weed growth and roots, including Johnson
grass, Crabgrass, Morning Glory, Rushgrass, and Canadian Thistle. Kill achieved by working
soil is permissible.
13. Remove stones, mortar, concrete, asphalt, rubbish, debris, and any materials larger than 2"
harmful to plant life from planting areas.
C. Apply organic commercial fertilizer, 16% nitrogen — 16% phosphoric acid — 16% potash (with
50% of Nitrogen slow release) at a rate of 7 lbs. per 1000 s.f. See SECTION 32 9000 PLANTS
for, additional information.
D. Place four (4) inched of topsoil in planting.
E. Spread compost mulch at a minimum depth of three (3) inches in all planting beds. Till into
topsoil to a minimum depth of 12 inches.
F. Compact prepared soil mix and float landscape areas to perimeter elevations providing for
proper drainage. Slope planting areas with 6 -inch crown or 2% minimum slope. Grade of
planting area soils should be 2" below the top of curbs, walks, or walls.
G. Soil preparation may be diminished or modified in areas where excavation and cultivation
would adversely impact existing underground utilities.
END OF SECTION
•
SECTION 32 9300 32 9300 - 1
PLANTS
SECTION 32 9300 — PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Requirements for Nursery Stock
B. Inspections and supervision.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 31 1316 - Selective Tree & Shrub Removal
B. Section 32 8423 - Irrigation Systems
C. Section 32 9113 - Soil Preparation
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Superintendent: Provide one person who shall:
1. Be present at all times during execution of work in this Section.
2. Be familiar with the materials and best methods for installation.
3. Direct work performed under this Section.
B. Government Inspection: plants and planting materials to meet or exceed the specifications of
federal, state and county laws requiring inspection for plant disease and control.
C. Industry Standards: Quality definitions, grading tolerances, and caliper to height ratios to be no
less than minimums specified in American Standards for Nursery Stock, published by American
Association of Nurserymen, Inc., ANSI Z60.1 -1973.
1. Standard reference may be obtained from publisher.
D. Landscape Contractors License: Contractor to be licensed in the state where the project is •
located.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Plant Material Procurement List: Contractor shall submit the list of plant names, sizes,
quantities of materials purchased/procured for project.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Notify Landscape Architect of delivery schedule so plant materials may be inspected
upon job site delivery. Remove unacceptable products immediately from job site.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 9300 32 9300 - 2
PLANTS
B. Storage and Handling: Protect products against damage or dehydration. Cover plant roots and
root balls with soil or other accepted material upon job site delivery, if not to be planted within
four hours. Store Plant Materials in shade and protect against harmful weather until planted.
Maintain Plant Materials not to be planted within four hours.
1.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect Existing Site Improvements: Verify location of underground facilities prior to doing
work. Protect active service lines whether indicated or not. Repair and make good any damage
to service lines or improvements caused by planting operations.
1.8 WARRANTEE
A. Plant materials must be in healthy condition at the end of one (1) growing season.
B. Replace unhealthy plants as directed by the Landscape Architect.
C. Warrantee begins at date of certificate of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PLANT REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide healthy nursery stock, well branched and rooted, full foliage when in leaf, free of
disease, injury, insects, weeds and weed roots. Do not use cold storage plants. All plants to be
checked for quality according to both size specifications and general health of plants before they
are taken off of delivery trucks for every delivery.
B. Root Protection:
1. Large plants (B & B) balled and burlapped with natural ball of size to ensure healthy
growth.
2. Small plants container grown furnished in removable containers or integral peat pots well
rooted to ensure healthy growth.
a. Grow container plants in containers from six months to two years prior to delivery,
with roots filling container but not root bound.
C. Plant Names: Plants to be true to name and one of each bundle or lot to be tagged with common
and botanical name and size of plants in accordance with standards of practice of the American
• Association of Nurserymen and to conform to Standardized Plant Names. 1942 edition,
published by J. Horace McFarland Company.
1. Botanical names shall take precedence over common names.
2.2 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Listed on Drawings
2.3 PLANTING SOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Clean, fertile, friable, natural loam or obtained from existing material on site, free of
debris, roots, stones, weeds and grass. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of topsoil prior to
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
SECTION 32 9300 32 9300 - 3
PLANTS
placement.
B. Compost Mulch: Fine Compo -Stuff by McFarlane's Bark, Inc. Phone (503) 659 -4240 or
approved equal.
C. Organic Commercial Fertilizer:
1. Fertilizer shall comply with Oregon State fertilizer laws, be uniform in composition, dry,
free flowing, organic and acceptable to Landscape Architect.
2. Standard approved brand, delivered in original containers, dry and free flowing, bearing
guaranteed analysis of manufacture.
a. 20% nitrogen - 10% phosphoric acid - 10% potash.
b. 20% " - 10% " - 5% "
controlled release, 10, 21 gram tablets (Agriform).
c. 16% nitrogen - 16% phosphoric acid -16% potash.
D. Planting Tablets: " Agriform" 10 and 21 gram tablets, 20 -10 -5 as manufactured by Agriform
International Chemicals, Inc., Newark, California or approved
E. Lime: Dolomite lime, calcium magnesium carbonate.
F.. Bark Mulch: Free from noxious weed, seed and all foreign material harmful to plant life.
Mulch shall be shredded Fir or Hemlock bark, maximum size to pass 3/4" mesh screen.
Compo Stuff as listed above is approved for Bark Mulch locations.
G. Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes and dead men of sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or
redwood, free of knotholes and other defects. Provide miscellaneous Hardware, Wire and
accessories as shown on details.
H. Tree Paint: Treeheal or approved equal. Use paint, which is waterproof, antiseptic, adhesive,
elastic and free of Kerosene, Coal tar, Creosote and other substances harmful to Plants.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate pit with sloping sides, to two times diameter of root ball or root system and not less
than 6 inches deeper for shrubs and twelve inches deeper for trees.
3.2 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Compact prepared soil mix and float landscape areas to perimeter elevations indicated on
Drawings. Slope planting areas with 6 -inch crown or 2% minimum slope.
B. Root ball Base: Place 6 inch minimum lightly compacted layer of prepared planting soil under
root system. Remove the pots of container grown plants and loosen the roots prior to planting.
C. Plant upright and face to give best appearance or relationship to adjacent plants and structures.
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01
•
SECTION 32 9300 32 9300 - 4
PLANTS
D. If plant is balled and burlapped, cut twine and burlap away from the top of the root ball and pull
burlap away from sides of the root ball. The burlap may be removed or placed in the bottom of
the plant pit so that no more than the bottom '/ of the root ball is covered.
E. Cut off cleanly all broken or frayed roots.
F. Place and compact prepared planting soil carefully to avoid injury to roots, fill all voids and air
pockets.
G. When planting hole is three - fourths filled, place planting tablets evenly spaced around each
plant in the following quantities per Plant:
1. Gallon container shrubs up to 12 inch spread: two 10 gram tablets.
2. Shrubs 12 inch to 36 inch spread: four 10 gram tablets.
3. Shrubs 36 inches and larger spread: three 21 gram tablets.
H. When hole is 4 inches deep, fill with water and let stand until water is absorbed by Soil.
1. Fill to finish grade and provide 2 inch depressed water basin at each Shrub and Tree.
Initial watering -in of trees and shrubs by underground sprinkler system is not permitted.
L Stake and guy trees immediately after planting.
3.3 FIELD PRUNING
A. Prune trees and shrubs to remove damaged branches, improve natural shape and thin not more
than 15% of branches.
B. Paint cuts more than 1/2" in diameter with pine tar.
3.4 BARK MULCHING
A. Apply three (3) inch layer of Bark Mulch over all planting beds within two days after planting.
B. Reinstall Plants not located as indicated on Drawings.
C. Reshape finish grade and remove excess materials from the site as directed by Landscape
Architect.
3.5 CLEAN -UP
A. Keep premises reasonably clean and tidy at all time. Remove all debris, equipment and surplus
materials on completion of work and leave the premises in an orderly and neat fashion.
END OF SECTION
RED ROCK CENTER - PHASE II SITE WORK AND BUILDING A
JOB NUMBER AD05183.01